Aarhat Publication & Aarhat Journal’s...SHIRISH S. PINGALE 76-83 16 PROGRESS OF CO-OPERATIVE SECTOR - A CASE STUDY OF MAHARASHTRA STATE DR. B. S. SALUNKHE 84-88 17 MICROFINANCE :

Dr.J.P Bhosale

Aarhat Publication & Aarhat Journal’s

AARHAT MULTIDISCIPLINARY

INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION RESEARCH

JOURNAL

Peer Reviewed Multidisciplinary Research Journal

ISSN- 2278-5655

Online and Print Journal

EduIndex Impact Factor: 5.18

UGC Approved Journal No 48178, 48818

Vol VII Special Issues No XV

Chief Editor

Dr.J.P.Bhosale

Journal On

Aarhat Multidisciplinary International Education Research Journals

Multidisciplinary Bi-monthly International Print/online Peer Reviewed Journal

ISSN- 2278-5655

Vol VII Special Issues No XV

Copyright:

@ All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a

retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,

photocopying, recording and/or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the

publisher.

Disclaimer:

All views expressed in the journal are those of the individual contributors. The editor

and Publisher are not responsible for the statements made or the opinions expressed by the

authors.

Date Of Publication: 15 April ,2018

Managing Editor & Publisher:

Pramila.D.Thokle (8355852142)

(Email Id : [email protected])

Publication : Aarhat Publication

108,Gokuldham Park,Dr.Ambedkar Chowk,

Near TV Tower,Badlapur(E),421503

Email ID:[email protected].

Aarhat Publication & Aarhat Journal’s

AARHAT MULTIDISCIPLINARY INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION RESEARCH JOURNAL

Peer Reviewed Multidisciplinary Research Journal

ISSN- 2278-5655

Online and Print Journal Impact Factor: 5.18

UGC Approved Journal No 48178, 48818

Editorial Board

Prof. Dr. Kalpana Kharade

Associate Professor

K.J.Somaiya Comprehensive College of

Education, Mumbai

Dr. Meena . P. Kute

Principal

P.V.D.T College of Education For

Women,Mumbai.

Dr.Shobha Kalebag

Associate Professor

Mahavir Mahavidhyalaya ,

Kolhapur

Dr.N.Johnson,

Asst Professor,Dept. of Lifelong Learning

School of Education,Alagappa University,

Karaikudi, India 630003

Dr.Sujata Ghokale,

Head Department of Sociology,PGSR,

SNDT Women's University,

Mumbai

Dr. Mahabir Singh Bhati,

Assistant Professor,

K . M . College of Education, Bhiwani-

127021, Haryana.

Dr. Nimit Gupta

Associate Professor

Fortune Institute of International

Business,Delhi Affiliated to AICTE, Delhi

Dr.Sardar Patil

Athalye-Sapre-Pitre College,

Devrukh. Tal.Sangmeshwar,

Dist. Ratnagiri-415008

Dr.Shashikant Mhalunkar,

P.G.Dept.of English,

B.N.N College ,Bhiwandi

Dr.Ashok Wagh,

Principal, Dept Of Commerce

B.N.N College ,Bhiwandi

Dr. Bikramjit Kaur

Assistant Professor

Government College of Commerce and

Business Administration,Chandigarh

Dr. Surinder Kaur

Assistant Professor

Post Graduate Government College Commerce

DeptSector- 46, Chandigarh

Mahajan Sagar Bhaskar Ranjana


EEE Department ,

MIT Aurangabad, Maharashtra

Dr.Sunil Sangle


Department of Botany ,

Rajaram college,Kolhapur

Dr. Rajendra Pandurang Patil

Assistant Professor

M.H.Shinde Mahavidyalaya, Tisangi

Tal-Gaganbavda,Dist-Kolhapur. 416206

Dr. Bhagwan Vitthal Jadhav

Associate Professor in Chemistry

Dept. of Chemistry,

C.K. Thakur, A. C. S. College,New Panvel.

Dr. Vijay Shamarao Sawant

Dept. of Botany,

Arts, Science and Commerce College Naldurg.

Tal.Tuljapur, Dist. Osmanabad, (M.S), India.

Pin 413 602

Dr. Patil Sarjerao Balkrishna

Prof. and Head Department of Physics

Krantisinh Nana Patil College, Walwa,

Tal-Walwa, Dist-Sangli

Dr. Adya Shakti Rai,

Associate Professor

Department of Visual Impairment

Faculty of Special Education

Dr. Shakuntala Misra National Rehabilitation

University, Lucknow

Dr. A. SRINIVASACHARLU

Assistant Professor of Education

New Horizon College of Education

100 Feet Road, Indiranagar

Bangalore – 560 008, Karnataka State, INDIA

Dr. Pratap V. Naikwade

Head, Department. of Botany

ASP College, Devrukh.

Maharashtra, India.

Dr. Rajendra Pal

Associate Professor and

Head Research Division

Central Institute of Educational Technology

(CIET),NCERT, Sri Aurobindo Marg,

New Delhi-110016.

Samson Olusola Olantunjin

Lecturer II

Lead City University,

Ibadan, Nigeria.

Dr. Laxmidhar Behera

Assistant Professor

Regional Institute of Education (NCERT).

Bhubaneswar, Orissa

Dr. Shashank S Sonawane

Associate Professor

Department of Library & Information Science.

Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar

Marathwada University, Aurangabad.

Dr. Dattatraya Gatade

Associate Professor and Head of Geography

Department

ASC College, Ramanandnagar, Sangali.

Dr. Sybil Thomas

Associate Professor

Department of Education,

University of Mumbai.

Dr. D.K. Gaikwad

Associate Professor

Department of Botany,

Shivaji University, Kolhapur.

Dr. Chetana Sonkamble

Associate Professor

Department of Education,

Shivaji University,Kolhapur

Dr. Manas Ranjan Panigrahi

Associate Professor

Dept of Pedagogical Science

College Of Education and Behavioral Sciences,

Harmayana University, Ethiopia

Dr. Rane A. R

Principal

K.C.E.S. College of Education,

Jalgaon

Dr. Bharat M. Pithadia

Associate Professor, Dept. of Commerce

Nagindas Khandwala College

(Autonomous), Mumbai

Dr. Londhe Sunil Rangrao


Department of Zoology,

Shri Shiv Shahu Mahavidyalya,

Sarud.

Dr. Sanindhar Shreedhar Gaikwad



Eknath Sitaram Divekar College,

Varvand, Tal- Daund, Dist- Pune,

Varvand- 415 001.

Dr. Nilofar Himmat Shaikh.


D.K.A.S.C. College, Ichalkarenji

Kolhapur.

Dr. Vandana Sharma

Associate Professor,

Department of Pol. Science

Bareilly College, Bareilly (IN)

Dr. Nimit Gupta

Philip Kotler Certified Marketing Trainer

Google Certified for Google Education

Associate Professor

Fortune Institute of International Business,

Delhi

Dr. Neena Dash

Assistant Professor

Education Departmnet

Ravenshaw University

Cuttack,Odisha

AMIERJ ISSN–2278-5655 Volume–VII, Special Issue–XV, April, 2018

Aarhat Multidisciplinary International Education Research Journal (AMIERJ) Page I

EduIndex Impact Factor 5.18 UGC Approved Journal No 48178, 48818

I N D E X

Sr.

No. Name of Research Paper & Researcher

Page

No.

1

SURVY OF AQUATIC INSECT FAUNA FROM RURAL FRESH WATER

RESERVIOR DHANORA DISTRICT BEED (M.S) INDIA

RAMESH N. ABDAR

1-7

2

PHYSICOCHEMICAL CHARACTERIZATION OF STARCH FROM TWO MAIZE VARIETIES

R. B. BARMUKH

8-13

3

HUMAN RESOURCE ACCOUNTING : WAY TO MEASURE THE

EFFECTIVENESS OF PERSONNEL

DR. BHOSALE J. P.

14-19

4

HIGHER EDUCATION IN THE NEW AGE OF GLOBALIZATION

DR. S. D. TAKALKAR

20-26

5

AVAILABILITY AND MANAGEMENT OF WATER IN THE RIVERS OF

RAIGAD DISTRICT

DR. SAMEER ARUN BUTALA

27-32

6

RECENT TRENDS IN BANKING SECTOR IN INDIA

PROF. DATTATRYA DALVI

33-36

7

LYTOCESTUS MULAANSIS N.SP. FROM FRESHWATER FISH

CLARIAS BATRACHUS FROM MULA DAM AT BARAGAON

NANDUR, TALUKA RAHURI, DISTRICT AHMEDNAGAR, M.S.

R. R. DANDAWATE

37-43

8

IMPORTANCE OF SOIL AND WATER ANALYSIS IN RECENT AGRICULTURE – CASE STUDY OF SANGAMNER TAHSIL

SANGITA DANDWATE

44-47

9

ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND HEALTH EDUCATION

S. M. GAIKWAD

48-50


Aarhat Multidisciplinary International Education Research Journal (AMIERJ) Page II


10

PHYSICO-CHEMICAL ANALYSIS (HARDNESS OF WATER) OF MAJALGAON DAM WATER, MAJALGAO, DIST.BEED(M.S.)

V. M. JAYSINGPURE

51-53

11


DR. KHAIRNAR KEWAL TRYAMBAK

54-57

12

CHARACTERIZATION OF WHEAT (TRITICUM AESTIVUM L.)

UNDER WATER STRESS CONDITIONS

S. L. KHAPKE

58-61

13

COMMUNICATION AND IT SERVICES

DR. LANGADE SUNIL SAMBHAJI

62-68

14

INTERTEXTUALITY : DEFINITIONS AND DIMENSIONS

DR. SATYAJIT T. PATIL

69-75

15

TOXICITY STUDY OF JUICE OF ADATHODA VASICA FRESH

LEAVES

SHIRISH S. PINGALE

76-83

16

PROGRESS OF CO-OPERATIVE SECTOR - A CASE STUDY OF

MAHARASHTRA STATE

DR. B. S. SALUNKHE

84-88

17

MICROFINANCE : KEY TO SUSTAINABLE SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT

DR. BHOSALE J. P.

89-96

18

A TRANSLATION STUDY OF THE SELECTED EXPRESSIONS ON

EDUCATION FROM LAXMAN MANE’S ‘UPRA’

DR. SURAJ SAWANT

97-100

19

TO STUDY OF TYPES OF CORPORATE EVENTS

DR. SANJAY B. SHINDE

101-105

20

TO STUDY OF IMPACT OF GST ON BANKING SECTOR


106-111


Aarhat Multidisciplinary International Education Research Journal (AMIERJ) Page III


21

JOB SATISFACTION AND MENTAL HEALTH OF ENGINEERING TEACHERS

DR. DILIP SHIVANE

112-122

22

BUDDHIST CAVE TEMPLES

DR. DIGAMBAR JANARDHAN SONAWANE

123-126

23

EDUCATION IN THE 19TH

CENTURY MAHARASHTRA

DR. JAGDISH CHHABURAO SONAWANE

127-132

24

SURFACE TENSION OF BINARY MIXTURES OF WATER AND

ALCOHOLS BY USING JAEGER’S METHOD

SUKDEO KISANRAO THORAT

133-137

25

POSITION AND ROLE OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE IN INDIA

BHUVANCHAND TIWARI

138-143

26

TRIBAL AREAS SOCIAL IMPACT OF DIMBHE DAM IN THE

SUBMERGED AREA OF THE AMBEGAON TEHSIL, DIST-PUNE

DR. VILAS RAMCHANDRA UGALE

144-157

27

TASAR CULTURE : A SUSTAINABLE LOW COST FARM FORESTRY

FOR POVERTY ALLEVIATION ENDEAVER FOR KOLHAPUR DISTRICT OF WESTERN MAHARASHTRA

S. R. WAGH

158-162

28

EFFICACY OF CERTAIN PLANT EXTRACTS AGAINST ACHAEA

JANATA L. AND SITOPHILUS ORYZAE L.

S. R. YANKANCHI

163-169

29

INVESTIGATING AND ANALYZING FINANCIAL EVIDENCE OF

FORENSIC ACCOUNTING

PROF. MRS. A. R. GHUMATKAR

170-176

30

IMPACT OF ELECTRONIC BANKING ON INDIAN BANKING SECTOR

KHANUJA PARAMJIT MAHENDRASINGH

177-184


Aarhat Multidisciplinary International Education Research Journal (AMIERJ) Page 1


SURVY OF AQUATIC INSECT FAUNA FROM RURAL FRESH WATER

RESERVIOR DHANORA DISTRICT BEED (M.S) INDIA

RAMESH N. ABDAR

Dept. of Zoology, Shri Amolak Jain‟s Vidya Prasarak Mandals,

Smt.Shanabai Kantilal Gandhi Art‟s, Amolak Science, and Panalal Hiralal Commerce

college kada, Tal, Ashti, Dist. Beed (M.S) India

Email - [email protected] Cell - 8805212691

ABSTRACT: The water spread area in India is about 4.5 million hectors. The major

habitats in fresh water include the lotic bodies (Rivers and streams), lentic bodies (Ponds

and lakes) ground water zones and of ecotonal water bodies where aquatic habitats meet.

(E.g. wet lands, marshes and estuaries) (Palmer et. al. 1997) The insects are the most

diversified group and plays and major role in lentic as well as lotic food chain of fishes,

other animals such as birds.The present investigation was assessed during July 2016 to Feb

2017. Study comprises of 45 species Odonata (Coenagrionidae- 2, Libellulidae-10),

Coleoptera (Dytiscidae-13, Hydrphilidae-6, Lampyridae-1). Hemiptera (Belostomatidae-2,

Corixidae-2, Mesoveliidae-1, Notonectidae-1, Nepidae-3) Diptera (Culicidae-1, Tipulidae-1,

Chironomidae-1) Plecoptera (Nemouridae-1)

KEY WORDS : Aquatic Insect Fauna, Rural Fresh Water Reservoir Dhanora, Dist. Beed

INTRODUCTION

Insects undergo an adaptive radiation for aerial, aquatic, terrestrial, and parasitic

environment with every considerable ecological niche. Man and Insects have been at war for

the same food and same place to live. They attack man and his domestic animals by causing

disease, they destroy his property and his crop hence they are very great importance to

human. Insects are dominating animals in the world .they occur all over the glob from

Antarctica to the tropics ,in air, in water even in deep sea, on land even in deserts, in caves

and on the mountains.

In terms of mega biodiversity India is ranked 9th

position in world (Mittermeier &

Mittermeier, 1997). Aquatic insects show a multitude of cleaver refinements. Almost all the

more important orders of insects are represented in the wet elements. Only a few species

spend their lives uninterruptedly in water. Some live out of water only as pupae. But major

pass through their developmental stages in water and adult respire in air .The water quality is

mailto:[email protected]




also dependent on the presence and absence of some insects in the water bodies. Some insects

in the waterbodies either it is polluted or non-polluted.

MATERIAL AND METHOD

The Dhanora water reservoir is an Irrigation project with an earthen dam on river

Kambli near village Dhanora. The river Kambli is a tributary of the river Bhīma in a Krishna

basin. It irrigates the land in the Ashti Tehsil of Beed district. The Dam is located at an

altitude of 190.066 N and longitude 75

0.042 E Tal, Ashti, Dist. Beed (M.S) India. At

Balaghate ranges locally called Garbhgri ranges (Gazette of India 1884, 1976)

The general climate of the District is typically monsoonal type with three season‟s

winter, summer and rainy. The summer season start from middle of February to May. The

winter season start from mid of November and to February. The rainy season start from June

to October. It is agriculturally well developed area. The land scope of Tehsil is dotted with

many man made reservoirs. These reservoirs were constructed for irrigation purpose,

however in the passing of the time the water use pattern has changed from agricultural to

domestic purpose, such as washing, bathing and cleaning etc. The local fisherman started the

fishing activities in the reservoirs. Increased human activities over the recent past years are

imposing greater stress on these ecosystems.

The entomofauna related with Limnological studies is poorly documented from the

areas so far in India. The early workers Sharma and Rai (1991),Thirumalai (1999),

Sivaramakrishnan (2005) ,Dinakaran and Anbalagan(2007).The present study is carried out

the abundance and aims to identify the common entomofauna around such important water

bodies.

The water samples were collected for entomofauna during the month of July 2016 to

Feb 2017 early morning 6.30 am to 9.30 am of local time from the four sites of the dam by

dipping the insect collecting standard pond net (standard-WP2pattern) with mesh size is 60

µm in the water. Samples were collected and preserved in absolute alcohols on fields. Some

insect identified at sites where as samples brought to the laboratory, Zoology Department and

observed under Stereo zoom microscope (Carl Zeiss, Stemi DV4) identified the specimen by

using standard taxonomic literature key.

The water samples were collected for entomofauna during the month of July 2016 to

Feb 2017 early morning 6.30 am to 9.30 am of local time from the four corners of the

waterbodies by dipping the insect collecting standard pond net (standard-WP2pattern) with

mesh size is 60 µm in the water. Samples were collected and preserved in absolute alcohols




on fields. Some insect identified at sites where as samples brought to the laboratory, Zoology

Department and observed under Stereo zoom microscope (Carl Zeiss, Stemi DV4) identified

the specimen by using standard taxonomic literature key.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

The total individuals‟ recorded in the study water bodies is 1259 which belong to 5

orders and 14 families. The maximum entomofauna belonging to order Coleoptera (33.04 %)

Hemiptera (25.86 %), Odonata (21.29 %) Diptera (20.01 %) species and Plecoptera (0.32 %)

respectively (Table No -1)




Table 1: Species and relative abundance of aquatic insects recorded From Study Site

Order Family Common name Zoological name Number

of insects

Odonata Coenagrionidae Golden dartllet Ischnura auroa

(Brauer) 13

Pigmy dartlet Agricnemis pygmaea

(Rambur) 10

Libellulidae Brown-backed red

marsh hawk Orthetrum chrysis 28

Blue-tailed forest

hawk

Orthetrum triangular

(Selys) 19

Blue marsh hawk Orthetrum glaucaum

(Brauer) 14

Orthetrum

pruinosum 28

Ground skimmer Diplocodus nebulosi 40

Diplocodus trivialis

(Rambur) 16

Pied paddy skimmer Neurothemis tullia

(Drury) 32

Neurothemis fulvia 18

Blue-tailed Yellow

Skimmer

Palpupleura

sexmaculata (F.)

36

Cratilla lineata 12

Coleoptera Dytiscidae Diving beetle Ciliatus sp. 45

Laccophilus sp. 20

Sandracottus sp. 14

Dineutus .Sp 11

Rhantus taprobanicus

(Sharp) 27

Lacconectus lambai

(Vazirani, ) 16

Sandracottus dejeanii

(Aube) 32

Cybister tripunctatus

lateralis(Fabricius) 21

Hydaticus satoi

(Wewalka) 10

Hydroglyphus

flammulatus (Sharp ) 22

Laccophilus

inefficiens (Walker ) 13

Laccophilus sharpi(

Regimbart) 19

Unidentified sp 04

Hydrphilidae Water scavenger

beetle Belostoma indicum 56




Hydaticus vittatus 33

Hyponeura sp. 21

Giant water

scavenger beetle Hydrophilus 23

triangularis Say 11

Laccophilus parvulus 13

Lampyridae Fire fly Photinus sp. 05

Hemiptera Belostomatidae Giant water bug Lethocerus indicus 57

Small water bug Diplonychus rusticus 22

Corixidae Water boat man Ccorixa sp. 34

Common pond skater Gerris. Sp. 70

Mesoveliidae Water treaders Mesovelia vittigera

Horvath 20

Notonectidae Water back swimmer Notonecta sp. 10

Nepidae Giant water scorpion Ranatra elongata 35

Giant water scorpion Ranatra varipea Stal 47

Water scorpion Laccotrephes ruber

(L.) 28

Diptera Culicidae Mosquitoes Culex sp. 210

Tipulidae Crane flies Tipula sp. 10

Chironomidae Midges Chironomidae sp. 30

Plecoptera Nemouridae Stone fly unidentified Sp. 04

Total = 14 45 1259

The family wise data of insect diversity, Dytiscidae having 13 species 254 individuals

is the most dominating 20.17 % family during the study period, Libellulidae 10 species 243

individuals is the second dominating family with 19.30% of the total percent of individuals.

Hydrphilidae 6 species 153 individuals 12.47 %, of the total percent of individuals Culicidae

210 individuals 16.81% third dominating family. Nepidae 3 species 110 individuals 8.80%

Corixidae 104 individuals 2 species, Belostomatidae 79 individuals 2 species,

Coenagrionidae 23 individuals 2 species, Lampyridae 5 individuals single species,

Mesoveliidae 20 individuals one species, Notonectidae 10 individuals single species

Tipulidae 10 individuals single species Chironomidae 30 individuals, Nemouridae 4

individuals and one species respectively.

Table 2: Family-wise distribution of aquatic insects

showing number of species and individuals

Order Family Species (% occurrence) Individuals (% occurrence)

Odonata Coenagrionidae

Libellulidae

02 (4.44)

10 (22.22)

23 (1.82)

243(19.30)

Coleoptera

Dytiscidae

Hydrphilidae

Lampyridae

13(28.88)

06 (13.33)

01 (2.22)

254 (20.17)

157 (12.47)

05 (0.39)




Hemiptera

Belostomatidae

Corixidae

Mesoveliidae

Notonectidae

Nepidae

02 (4.44)

02 (4.44)

01 (2.22)

01 (2.22)

03 (6.66)

79 (7.95)

104 (8.32)

20 (1.60)

10 (0.80)

110(8.80)

Diptera

Culicidae

Tipulidae

Chironomidae

01 (2.22)

01 (2.22)

01 (2.22)

210 (16.81)

10 (0.80)

30 (2.40)

Plecoptera

Nemouridae

01 (2.22)

04 (0.32)

Total = 45 1259

CONCLUSION

The most of Invertebrates remain under water surface Entomofauna of aquatic habitat

is significantly plays major role. Aquatic insects are indispensable part of aquatic food chains

and recycling of major nutrients in freshwater ecosystem. The maximum occurrence of

aquatic entomofauna is valuable for people to the role of insects in the food chain, fishing and

to control the water pollutions insect are the indicators of water pollutions

About 45 species of aquatic insects identified from the water bodies, are directly or

indirectly plays major role in to maintain the aquatic food chain in same water reservoir the

dominance of insect species showed the less pollution of the water bodies. So far within short

period of the study there is less data available on the aquatic insects distributed in in the lentic

water bodies; there for true number of species estimated from the water bodies might be

different.

REFERENCES

1. Anbalagan S, Kaleeswaran B and Balasubramanian C (2004) Diversity and Trophic

categorization of aquatic insects of Courtallam hills of Western Ghats. Entomology 29:1-

6.

2. Dinakaran S and Anbalagan S (2007) Anthropogenic impacts on aquatic insects in six

streams of south Western Ghats. J. Insect Science, 7:1-7.

3. Dudgeon D., 1999. Tropical Asian Streams: Zoo benthos, Ecology and Conservation,

Hong Kong University Press.

4. Ghosh S.K. & Nilsson A.N.( 2012): Catalogue of the diving beetles of India and adjacent

countries(Coleoptera: Dytiscidae). Skorvnopparn, Umel, Supplement, 3: 1-77.




5. Ghosh S.K. & Hegde V.D. (2013): On a Collection of Aquatic Beetles of Renuka

Wildlife Sanctuary,Himachal Pradesh, India (Order Coleoptera: Gyrinidae, Dytiscidae

and Hydrophilidae). Rec.zool. Surv. India, 113 (part-2): 61-67

6. Mittermeier, R.A., G.A.B. Fonseca Da, A.B. Rylands and C.G. Mittermeier, 1997. In:

R.A. Mittermeier,: P. Robles Gil and C.G. Mittermeier, (Eds Mega diversity: Earth‟s

Biologically Wealthiest Nations, CEMEX, Monterrey, Mexico, pp: 39-49.

7. Majumder, J., R. Goswami and B.K. Agarwala, 2011. A preliminary study on the

insect community of Phytotelmata, an ephemeral ecosystem in Tripura, Northeast India.

Nebio, 2: 27-31.

8. Subramanian, K.A., 2009. A Checklist of Odonata (Insecta) of India. Zoological Survey

of India Western Regional Station, Pune-411 044 Maharashtra, India, pp: 1-38

9. Sivaramakrishnan KG, Venkataraman K, Moorthy RK, Subramanian KA and

Utkarsh G (1995) Aquatic insect diversity and ubiquity of the streams of the Western

Ghats, India. Journal of Indian Institute of Science, 80:537-552.

10. Subramanian and Sivaramakrishnan (2005) Impact of riparian land use on stream

insects of Kudremukh National Park, Karnataka state, India. Journal of Insect

11. Thirumalai G (1999) In: Aquatic and semi-aquatic heteroptera of India. Indian

Association of Aquatic Biologists, Hyderabad, 7:74.

12. https//www.coursehero.com

http://www.coursehero.com/




PHYSICOCHEMICAL CHARACTERIZATION OF STARCH FROM TWO MAIZE

VARIETIES

R. B. BARMUKH

Post Graduate Research Centre, Department of Botany,

Modern College of Arts, Science and Commerce, Shivajinagar, Pune-5.

Email : [email protected]

ABSTRACT : Starch has many applications in various industries. Starches obtained from

various cereals differ in their physicochemical properties and therefore, every starch type is

not suitable for all starch-requiring applications. It is necessary to analyse physicochemical

properties of available starches. The present investigation therefore was undertaken to

analyse and compare the starches from two varieties of maize, Karnadhar, and VMH-5555.

Based on the parameters analysed, it was observed that the starch obtained from Karnadhar

variety is more stable and has more desirable properties than starch obtained from VMH-

5555.

KEY WORDS: Physicochemical properties of starch, starch

INTRODUCTION

Maize is an important food crop and is grown extensively in tropical and subtropical

regions of the world. It contains about 66% starch. The diverse use of starch makes it a very

versatile product. Maize starch is a typical cereal starch with distinctly low proteins and ash

content. Its carbohydrate content of high purity makes it of use in several industries. Maize

starch is a white or creamy powder having various direct and indirect applications in

industries. Starch can be modified to suit individual requirement of the user and is used in

different industries as a blinder, stabilizer, thickening and suspending agent viz. textile, paint,

paper, pharmaceuticals etc. Starch is the major dietary component for humans. In Indian

culture, the main purpose of starch utilization in food remains aesthetic rather than

nutritional. This biopolymer constituent is an excellent row material to modify food texture

and consistency. The amount as well as type of starch is important for texture of given food

product. The present investigation was aimed at isolation of starch from two commercial

varieties of maize, Karnadhar and VMH-5555, commonly grown in Maharashtra and partial

morphological and biochemical characterisation of these starches.




MATERIALS AND METHODS

Maize seeds of Karnadhar and VMH-5555 varieties were procured from local market

at Nasik. The seeds were stored in air tight plastic bags at room temperature.

Analytical methods used for starch characterisation were as suggested by American

Association of Cereal Chemists (AACC) with slight modifications.

ISOLATION OF STARCH

Seeds were steeped in deionized water at room temperature for 16 h and then ground

in a warring blender for 1 min and the flour was suspended in water. The slurry was stirred

for 1 h, screened over four layered muslin cloth and then centrifuged for 20 min at 10,000

rpm. The grey sediment which accumulated on top of the white starch pellet during

centrifugation was carefully scraped off and discarded. The pellet was then dispersed in

deionized water and centrifuge for 20 min at 10,000 rpm, with grey sediment scraped off

after each wash. The process was repeated three times in total, and then the starch pellet was

washed with 95% ethanol, after with the starch was air dried at room temperature.

DETERMINATION OF ACIDITY

Two gram sample was shaken at a moderate rate for 30 min in a beaker containing

100 ml distilled water for 30 min. the suspension was gravity filtered through filter paper.

Fifty millilitre suspension was diluted with 50 ml distilled water and 0.5 ml 0.5%

phenolphthalein indicator was added. The sample was titrated immediately with 0.1 N

NaOH.

BLUE VALUE (AMYLOSE)

One hundred milligram sample was transferred quantitatively to l00 ml volumetric

flask. To this sample, 1 ml ethanol and 10 ml NaOH (1 N) was added. The suspension was

allowed stand until sample was completely gelatinized. From this, 2.5 ml solution was

dispensed into a 100 ml volumetric flask and 50 ml distilled water was added and after

addition of 2 drops of phenolphthalein it was titrated with 0.1 N HCI until the pink indicator

colour just disappeared. To this solution, 2 ml of 0.20 % iodine solution was added and

diluted to 100 ml with distilled water, mixed well and allowed to stand for 30 min. A

reference solution (blank) was prepared by diluting 2 ml of 0.20% iodine solution to 100 ml

volume with distilled water and mixed before use. Absorbance of sample solution was

recorded at 620 nm against the reference solution.




MOISTURE

Ten gram of gains in a Petri pate was dried in oven at 60 0C till constant weight was

obtained. The Petri plate were reweighed and moisture content was calculated as,

% moister = [(Final Weight- Initial Weigh)/Final Weight] × 100

FREEZE - THAW STABILITY

The 5% maize starch pastes were subjected to a one cycle freeze - thaw process of 18

h storage in 4 0C freezers, followed by 6 h storage at room temperature. These samples were

then centrifuged at 7000 rpm for 10 min. The percentage of water separated after the freeze -

thaw cycle was measured.

SWELLING POWER AND SOLUBILITY PATTERN

The swelling power and solubility pattern of starch were determined according to

method described by Tester and Morrison (1990) and Anderson (1969) respectively.

Swelling power is a measure of the hydration capacity of starch and is expressed as the

weight of centrifuge swollen granules, divided by the weight of original dry starch used to

make paste. Exactly 0.2 g granule sample was suspended in 10 ml of distilled water and

incubated in thermostatically controlled water bath at 95 0C in tarred screw cap tube of 15 ml

capacity. The suspension was stirred over 30 min. periods to keep the starch granule

suspended. The tube was rapidly cool at 20 0C the cooled centrifuged at 5000 rpm for 15 min

to separate the jell and the supernatant was removed and poured into dish for subsequent

analysis of solubility pattern. After this, weight of the swollen sediment was determined.

The supernatant liquid (dissolved starch) was poured into tarred evaporating dish and

put in air oven at 100 0C For 4 h. Water solubility index was determined from the amount of

dried solid recovered by evaporating, supernatant and was expressed as gram dried solids per

gram of sample.

SOLUBLE MATERIAL

To the 20 ml sample, 198 ml of distilled water was added at room temperature, and

contents were agitated at moderate rate for 30 min. The suspension was filtered through

Whatman filter paper into a dry receiver, returning the first 25 ml of filtrate to the

suspension. One hundred millilitre aliquot of filtrate was transferred to a tarred evaporating

dish and contents evaporated to apparent dryness on a steam bath. The sample was dried in a

vacuum oven for 2 h at 100 0C weighed. Percent soluble material was determined by using




the formula

% of soluble = [Residue weight (g) × 2 × 200] / Sample weight (g)

ENZYME HYDROLYSIS

Enzymatic hydrolysis of starch with crude amylase preparation was studied. Fifty

gram potato tubers were cut into small pieces and the skin was removed. The pieces were

incubated overnight at 4 0C in 0.67% saline. The potato pieces were homogenized in a

blender and the extract was left undisturbed for 3 h so as to settle down the excess of starch.

The clear part was then centrifuged at 10000 rpm and the supernatant was used as a crude

enzyme. To 0.2 ml enzyme extract, 0.5 ml acetate buffer, pH 4.8 was added. The volume was

raised to 1ml with distilled water. One millilitre distilled water was used as blank. One

millilitre 1% starch was then added and incubated at 37 0C for 30 min. The sugars released

were reacted with 1 ml dinitrosalicylic acid (DNSA) reagent. The absorbance was

measured at 529 nm and the reducing sugars released were quantified by using standard

curve prepared using D-glucose.

ACID HYDROLYSIS

Acid hydrolysis of starch was carried out by subjecting 100 mg of starch powder in 2

ml of 2.5 N HCI and incubating the suspension at 100 0C for 4 h. The reducing sugars

released were quantified by following DNSA method (Miller, 1959).

MORPHOLOGY OF MAIZE STARCHES

Iodine Staining:

The dilute iodine solution (0.1 M) was used to distinguish red-staining waxy starch

granules from blue-staining regular or high amylase starch granules under bright light. The

starch sample was suspended in 15 ml water, stirred magnetically and about 3 ml of iodine

solution in 85 ml water was added rapidly. A drop of the suspension was transferred to a

microscope slide, which was covered and brought into focus at 15X for granule counting.

Red-stained and blue-stained granules were counted separately.

STATISTICAL ANALYSIS

All the experiments were repeated at least thrice and the values reported are

mean± standard deviation. The means were compared by following Student‟s t test.





The percentage yield of starch was about 15% more from Karnadhar variety (45±2%)

than VMH-5555 variety (39±3%). This difference in yield might be due to difference in the

texture of maize seeds. The Karnadhar maize seeds showed higher firmness than VMH5555

and during the isolation procedure, a substantial amount of intermediate materials was lost.

However, a powder with higher whiteness was obtained with VMH5 55 5 maize than

Kamadar. The results on the partial characterization of starch are presented in Table 1.The

pH of the starch paste prepared from Karnadhar variety had higher pH which also correlated

to about 70% more titratable acidity than VMH 5555 variety. The Karnadhar variety also had

more moisture content than VMH-5555. The procedure for blue value determination gave

higher reading for Karnadhar starch than VMH-5555 starch. Blue value parameter is

correlated with percentage amylose content. Thus the percentage amylase content was also

higher in Karnadhar starch compared to VMH-5555 starch.

Table 1. Partial characterization of maize starch

Characteristic Karnadhar VMH5555

Titratable acidity *(ml NaOH) 0.75±0.12 0.55±0.16

pH 7.8 ±0.3 7.5 ±0.1

Moisture (%) * 13.8±1.1 10.5±0.8

Blue value (A660) 0.102±0.006 0.096±0.003

Freeze-thaw Stability (%) * 18 ±1.3 12 ±1.9

Enzyme hydrolysis (A520) 0.092 ±0.04 0.130 ±0.03

Acid hydrolysis (A520) 0.509 ±0.035 0.526 ±0.025

Swelling power (%) * 25.45± 2.3 30.60 ±3.3

Solubility pattern (%) 0.25 ±0.08 0.27±0.03

The acid as well as enzymatic hydrolysis of starch clearly indicated that starch from

VMH-5555 was much more stable than from Karnadhar. The optical density of VMH5555

starch was greater than Karnadhar. Higher optical density is indicative of more release of

reducing sugars thus VMH5555 starch was found to be more susceptible enzyme and acid

hydrolysis. The Karnadhar and VMH5555 maize starches presented the different freeze -

thaw stability of 18% and 12% respectively. In general, it has been reported that normal

maize starches show poor freeze-thaw stability and waxy starches have high stability to

freeze - thaw cycles (Singhal and Kulkarni, 1990; American Association of Cereal Chemists.

and Rayas-Duarte 1998). The swelling power of Karnadhar (25.45%) andVMH5555




(30.61%) as well as the solubility pattern of Karnadhar (0.25%) and VMH5555 (0.270/0)

therefore the swelling power and solubility pattern of both verities have same because of

Amylase solubilized during starch gelatinization at high temperature contributes to swelling

of starch granules (Lii et al, 1982). Both varieties of maize starches were polygonal in shape,

but the size of starch granules was different. The starch granules were slightly bigger in

VHM-5555 (55-85 µ) as compared to those from Karnadhar (40-70 µ).

CONCLUSION

The partial physico-chemical characterization of starches isolated from two varieties

of maize, viz., Karnadhar and VMH-5555 clearly demonstrated that the starch obtained from

Karnadhar variety is more stable and has more desirable properties than observed for VMH-

5555 starch. These results suggest possibility of wider applications of starch from Karnadhar

variety.

REFERENCES

1. American Association of Cereal Chemists. LA (North DSUFN., Rayas-Duarte P (1998)

Cereal chemistry. American Association of Cereal Chemists

2. Lii CY, Chang SM, and Young YL (1982) Investigation of the physical and chemical

properties of banana starches. J Food Sci 47:1493–1497.

3. Miller GL (1959) Use of dinitrosalicylic acid reagent for determination of reducing sugar

Analytical Chemistry 1959 31 (3), 426-428

4. Singhal RS, and Kulkarni PR (1990) Some properties of Amaranthus paniculatas

(Rajgeera) Starch Pastes. Starch - Stärke 42:5–7.




HUMAN RESOURCE ACCOUNTING : WAY TO MEASURE THE FFECTIVENESS

OF PERSONNEL

DR. BHOSALE J. P.

Head : Research Centre in Commerce.

Arts, Commerce & Science College, Narayangaon,

Tal :Junnar, Dist : Pune, Pin : 410504, Maharashtra, India.

Savitribai Phule Pune University, Pune.

E-mail :[email protected], [email protected]

Cell : 9860360733, 9970374747

ABSTRACT : The article highlights the significance of Human resource valuation. The

paper also focuses on need and advantgaes of Human Resource Accounting. Human

Resource is worth and capital investments. That is why firms also need to search people those

are on capital investment along with capital while many entrepreneurs are focused on

securing capital they have to make sure they have the right management team and employer

in place if they want to attract investor create value and maximum wealth. Solid management

team in what sets a company apart with venture capitalists. Human resource accounting is

basically an information system that tells management what changes are occurring over time

to the human resources of the business. Human resource accounting is an attempt to identify

and report investment made in resources of the organization that are not presently accounted

for under conventional accounting practice. Prof. Sidney Davidson defines human resource

accounting as a „term used to describe a variety of proposals that seek to report and

emphasize the importance of human resources-Knowledgeable, trained and loyal employees-

in a company‟s earnings process and total assets‟.

Key Words : Human Resource Accounting, Human Resource Auditing, Human Capital,

Capital Investment, Effectiveness of Personnel etc.

INTRODUCTION:

Human resource Accounting (HRA) involves accounting for expenditure related to

human asset in an organization as opposed to traditional accounting which merely expenses

these costs and reduces profit which to our mind suboptimise financial reporting. As a result

of this agitation and the need for harmonization of human with other resources in financial

reporting, this study was carried out (Akintoye, 2012). Resources are "all human, material,

real and monetary elements that can be drawn and used in the production of economic goods

to satisfy social needs". With the advent of the new economy, knowledge-based economy it





has been concluded that human resources becomes increasingly more important in

determining the total value of an organization. Human capital refers to a set of knowledge

and competence, skills and training, innovation and capabilities, attitudes and skills, learning

ability and motivation of the people who form the organization.

According to American Accounting Association, HRA is “the process of identifying

and measuring data about human resources and communicating this information to interested

parties”. HRA is similar in principle to the financial accounting, that is, just as financial

accounting reflects the costs of assets such as building and machinery, HRA shows human

resources as capital not as expenses. Thus, HRA shows the investment, the organization

makes in its people and how their values change over a period of time. HRA is a

sophisticated way to measure the effectiveness of personnel management activities and the

use of people in an organization. Flamholz has defined HRA as “accounting for people as an

organizational resource. It involves measuring the costs incurred by an organization to

recruit, select, hire, train and develop the human assets”.

OBJECTIVES OF RESEARCH STUDY :

The present research study was carried out with following objectives in view:

1. To study the importance of human resource accounting for smooth functioning of

business organization.

2. To examine the human resource accounting practices in India.

3. To analyze the extent in which HRA information help to make wise decisions.

4. To exmine the perception of management and employees on Human Resource

Accounting.

HYPOTHESIS OF THE RESEARCH STUDY :

The said research study is carried out with the following hypothesis in view:

1 Implication of human resource accounting practices are increasing day by day in

Indian busisiness organization.

2 Human resource accounting practices helps to smooth functioning of business

concerns.

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY :

The present research study uses the most recent available published secondary data.

To achieve the above stated objectives, the secondary data was used. The secondary data that




are mainly used are published in annual reports of various banks and survey reports of

leading business magazines. The secondary data was also used from various reference books

related to Human Resource, Human Resource Accounting, E-Commerce, M-Commerce,

Information Technology, Marketing, Banking, Finance, Commerce, Management etc. For the

said research study the secondary data is also collected from the various National and

International Research Journals which are related to Commerce, Management, Marketing and

Human Resource.

For the said research study the data pertaining to the above objectives was collected

and reviewed the literature on the topic concerned. The literature was thus collected by

visiting various libraries. The Secondary data is also collected from various websites.

HUMAN RESOURCE ACCOUNTING IN INDIA

In India, HRA is still in the early stage of development. Even though HRA was

introduced before 1980s, it started gaining popularity in India after it was adopted and

popularized by Neyveli Lignite Corporation (NLC) and Bharat Heavy Electricals Limited

(BHEL). Mahalingam notes “Pundits of today, asset that while the other forms of capital

including material, equipment, tools and technology, only represent inert potentialities, it is

human capital that converts this potential and energies for the creation of wealth.”. The

Indian Companies Act does not provide any scope for furnishing any significant information

about human resources in financial statements. HRA has not been introduced so far in any

legislation and thereby Human Resources are not yet recognized as „assets‟ neither in the

Balance sheet nor in the Annual Report of many of the Public or Private companies in India.

Even in the new Companies Act 2013, there is no specific provision regarding the accounting

and reporting requirement of Human Resource in Annual Report of Indian Companies. The

Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) has issued Accounting Standard (AS) on

various aspects of accounting but it is not possible for ICAI to bring any exact accounting

standard for measurement and reporting of human resource of an organisation. This was the

greatest drawback relating to HRA. However there is a growing trend towards the

measurement and reporting of human resources in Indian companies, it could be noticed

during the past few years, sensing the benefits from valuing and reporting the human assets,

many Public companies have voluntarily disclosed all relevant information related to human

resource in their books. In recent years some Private companies also have started to disclose

information about their work force along with the financial statement. HRA has become a




separate section of Annual accounts of Indian companies like Steel Authority of India Ltd.,

Minerals & Metals Trading Corporation Ltd., Oil India Ltd., Hindustan Unilever Ltd.,

Hindustan Zinc Ltd., Cement Corporation of India, ONGC, Engineers India Ltd, National

Thermal Power Corporation Ltd., Minerals and Metals Trading Corporation, Madras

Refineries Ltd., Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd., Indian Oil Corporation, Associated

Cement Corporation , Infosys Technologies Ltd., Hindustan Copper Ltd., Rolta, Wipro,

Satyam Computer etc., have started disclosing some valuable information regarding human

resources in their financial statements.

ADVANTAGES OF HUMAN RESOURCE ACCOUNTING

The main advantages of Human Resource Accounting are as follows :

1. Information for manpower planning - HRA provides useful information about the cost

and value of human resources. It shows the strengths and weakness of the human

resources. All this information helps the managers in planning and making the right

decisions about human resources. Thus, it provides useful information for Manpower

Planning and Decision Making.

2. Information for making personnel policies - HRA provides useful information for

making suitable personnel policies about promotion, favorable working environment, job

satisfaction of employees, etc.

3. Utilization of human resources - HRA helps the organisation to make the best

utilization of human resources.

4. Proper placements - HRA helps the organisation to place the right man in the right post

depending on his skills and abilities.

5. Increases morale and motivation - HRA shows that the organisation cares about the

employees and their welfare. This increases their morale and it motivates them to work

hard and achieve the objectives of the organisation.

6. Attracts best human resources - Only reputed organisations conduct HRA. So,

competent and capable people want to join these organisations. Therefore, it attracts the

best employees and managers to the organisation.

7. Designing training and development programs - HRA helps the organisation to design

a suitable training and development program for its employees and managers.

8. Valuable information to investors - HRA provides valuable information to present and

future investors. They can use this information to select the best company for investing

their money.




NEED FOR HUMAN RESOURCE ACCOUNTING

The need for human asset valuation arose as a result of growing concern for human

relations management in the industry. Behavioural scientists concerned with management of

organizations pointed out the following reasons for HRA:

1. Under conventional accounting, no information is made available about the human

resources employed in an organization, and without people the financial and physical

resources cannot be operationally effective.

2. The expenses related to the human organization are charged to current revenue instead of

being treated as investments, to be amortized over a period of time, with the result that

magnitude of net income is significantly distorted. This makes the assessment of firm and

inter-firm comparison difficult.

3. The productivity and profitability of a firm largely depends on the contribution of human

assets. Two firms having identical physical assets and operating in the same market may

have different returns due to differences in human assets. If the value of human assets is

ignored, the total valuation of the firm becomes difficult.

4. If the value of human resources is not duly reported in profit and loss account and balance

sheet, the important act of management on human assets cannot be perceived.

5. Expenses on recruitment, training, etc. are treated as expenses and written off against

revenue under conventional accounting. All expenses on human resources are to be

treated as investments, since the benefits are accrued over a period of time.

CONCLUSION :

This is an era of globalization and cost cuts; therefore, Human Resource Accounting

would give an organization a correct vision towards the way forward. In the ultimate analysis

it must be said that the concept of Human Resource Accounting has been appreciated by the

accounting profession and by and large its usefulness has also been acclaimed in the literature

but unfortunately, its application has not flourished throughout the world. The International

Accounting Standards Board (IASB), and the Accounting Standards Board (ASB), has not

been able to formulate any specific accounting standards on measurement and reporting of

cost and value of Human Resource of an organization. Hence, considering the paramount

importance of Human Resource Accounting, proper initiation should be taken by the

Government as well as Professional Boards at the National and International levels in respect

of formulation of specific accounting standard and suitable valuation models on the

measurement and reporting of the value of Human Resource.




Human resources accounting is an accounting measurement system. Human

Resource Accounting was introduced way back in the 1980s, it started gaining popularity in

India. Human resource accounting or human resource valuation is an attempt to identify and

quantify the investments made in human resource of an organization. HRA helps to measure

the value of employees, which helps management in decision making. The Indian Companies

Act does not provide any scope for furnishing any significant information about human

resoureces in financial statements.

REFERENCES :

1) Ajit Jadhav, Amita Koli, Human Resource Accounting-Gaining Prominence in India,

Research Paper.

2) Mahalingram, Human Capital, Praxis, Business line, May 2001.

3) Management accounting : Ravi.M.K.Kishore-taxmann allied public cations.

4) Anita Mishra & Monalika Rath – Role and Significance of Human Resource Accounting

in the Era of Economic Recession- http://www.indianmba.com.

5) Human Resoruce Accounting Practices Adopted in India Industries -

http://vlex.in/vid/resource-accounting-indian-industries.

6) Tiwari, Amitabh Deo, Kodwani Ravindra (2006) „Human Resource Accounting: A new

dimension‟. Canadian Accounting Association (CAAA), Annual Conference.

7) Guru Prasad Puttu (2009) „Human Resource Accounting Issues na Challenges‟, ICIMP.

8) Dinesh K. Gupta, „Human Resource Accounting in India-Some Issues‟, 1988.

9) www.egyankosh.ac.in

10) www.scribd.com

11) www.caclubindia.com

http://www.indianmba.com/

http://vlex.in/vid/resource-accounting-indian-industries

http://www.egyankosh.ac.in/

http://www.scribd.com/

http://www.caclubindia.com/




HIGHER EDUCATION IN THE NEW AGE OF GLOBALIZATION

DR. S. D. TAKALKAR

Head Department of Commerce,

Gramonnati Mandal‟s Arts, Commerce and Science College,

Narayangaon, Pune, Maharashtra-410 504.

E-Mail : [email protected] Cell : 9890525040

Abstract

The responsibility of institution of higher education in the context of the changing

scenario is not only confined to imparting education but also to forecast the future needs of

economy. Education is central to the human capital development and economic development

of any country. Even for India, where only 12% of the addressable population goes to college

and nearly 70% of the population is in rural areas, education is considered a very important

channel for socioeconomic mobility. Unfortunately, despite huge demand and need of

education, policy framework in India has stifled access quality and innovation in education.

Skills and knowledge are the driving forces of economic growth and social development of

every nation. Their relevance and importance has amplified with the increasing pace of

globalization and technological changes all over the world. Countries with higher and better

levels of skills adjust more effectively to the challenges and opportunities of globalization.

Many traditional Universities in India still are with their bad old recruitment, looking

State funding indifferent to self financing courses, outdated examination to self financing

courses, outdated examination system, obsolete teaching methods low standards. Time has

ripped and reaching 2005 years, that foreign Universities are entering into India soil for

competitiveness. By all manses, very shortly, new twist and turns would be seen in higher

education system. Education is an important index of human development. Among various

levels of education, higher education has a influential impact on development.

Keywords – Higher Education, Commerce Education, Higher Education Sector, Ecocomic

Development.

INTRODUCTION

Education is an important index of human development. Among various levels of

education, higher education has a influential impact on development. Higher education




empowers the individual with necessary skills and competence for achieving important

personal and social goals. Higher education is indeed a vital tool for intellectual and cultural

developments and a mean for achieving wider social aspirations. Revolution in information

technology have brought new challenges of higher education.

The responsibility of institution of higher education in the context of the changing

scenario is not only confined to imparting education but also to forecast the future needs of

economy. Education is central to the human capital development and economic development

of any country. Even for India, where only 12% of the addressable population goes to college

and nearly 70% of the population is in rural areas, education is considered a very important

channel for socioeconomic mobility. Unfortunately, despite huge demand and need of

education, policy framework in India has stifled access quality and innovation in education.

Skills and knowledge are the driving forces of economic growth and social

development of every nation. Their relevance and importance has amplified with the

increasing pace of globalization and technological changes all over the world. Countries with

higher and better levels of skills adjust more effectively to the challenges and opportunities of

globalization.

As India progressively moves towards becoming a “knowledge-based” economy, it

becomes increasingly important that it focuses on advancement of skills and these skills have

to be relevant to the emerging economic environment. Earlier skill development largely

meant development of shop floor or manual skills. Even in this area there are major

deficiencies in our workforce which need to be rectified.

CONCEPTUAL BACKGROUND

It is useful at this stage to briefly lay out the structure of the higher education system

in India.There are several types of higher education institutions in India, viz. universities,

deemed to beuniversities, colleges, institutions of national importance, post-graduate

institutions for estimates. Universities can be set up by an act of the Parliament or by the

State Legislature.Only universities and deemed to be universities and the institutions of

national importance aregenerally authorized to grant degrees. Other post-graduate institutions

and polytechnics that arerecognized by the All India Council of Technical Education

(AICTE) can grant post graduatediplomas and diplomas. Detailed information on the

structure, regulatory institutions, coursesand processes of admissions in the Indian

educational system is provided. Inwhat follows, we highlight a few key features of the higher

education system.




In the new knowledge economy the skill sets can range from professional, conceptual,

managerial, operational behavioural to interpersonal and inter-domain skills. In the 21st

century as science progresses towards a better understanding of the miniscule, that is, genes,

particles, bits and bytes and neurons, knowledge domains and skill domains also multiply and

become more and more complex. We provide a brief but comprehensive overview of linkages

between higher education and the high tech sector and study the major linkages in India. We

find that the links outside of the labor market are weak. This is attributed to a regulatory

structure thatseparates research from the university and discourages good faculty from

joining, which erodes the quality of the intellectual capital necessary to generate new

knowledge. In the labor market, we find a robust link between higher education and high-tech

industry, but despite a strong private sector supply response to the growth of the high-tech

industry, the quality leaves much to be desired. Poor university governance may be limiting

both labor market and non-labor market linkages. Industry efforts to improve the quality of

graduates are promising but over reliance on industry risks compromising workforce

flexibility. Addressing the governance failures in higher education is necessary to strengthen

the links between higher education and high tech industry.

OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY

The present study was carried out with following objectives in view.

1. To study the role of Higher Education in the new age of globalization.

2. To study the opportunities for Higher Education in the need for quality improvement.

3. To suggest the strategic measures for improvement of quality in Higher Education.

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

For the present research study the data pertaining to the above objectives was

collected and reviewed the literature on the topic concerned. The literature was thus collected

by visiting various libraries. Some Government offices were also visited for getting office

record and statistical data. The secondary data is also collected from various websites.

With the above objectives keep in mind the instructed Interview Method and Desk

Research Method was basically adopted. The Secondary Data is collected from various

reference books related to Higher Education, Commerce Education, Higher Education Sector,

Commerce & Management, and Marketing & Finance etc. For said research study secondary

data is also collected from the National and International Research Journals which are related

to Commerce, Management, Marketing and Higher Education.




HYPOTHESIS OF THE STUDY

The Hypothesis of present research study is as under :

H1 Higher education empowers the individual with necessary skills and competence for

achieving important personal and social goals.

OPPORTUNITIES FOR HIGHER EDUCATION

1. Improvement in the rate of enrolment in higher education: In India the enrolment in

higher education is just 6% of the relevant age group as against 50% reached by

developed countries. The economy will experience an increased rate of enrolment due to

increase in the number of seats supplied by new entrants in education.

2. Improved resource allocation but it could manage to allocate only 3.5% of GNP due to

resources crunch. Entry of private sector will enhance the future well being of H.E. which

is crucial in the context of Governmental financial austerity.

3. Qualitative education programmes : many educational institutions are excessively

dependent upon Govt. grants and hence they are forced to function in a rigid structure

taking non cognizance of changing times and demands. With GATS institutions may

venture out of these controls and provide new qualitative and competitive education

programs fine-tuned to the changing times.

4. Scope for development of faculty performance : Many educational institutions are non

performance or withdrawal of subsidy due to paucity of funds such institutions may

disappear and give rise to new education systems which will emphasize on self

evaluation, introspection and improved faculty performance.

5. Cost-effective education programs : One of the modes of supply of education under

GATS is commercial presence i.e. entry of foreign institutions in the domestic market.

This will make transnational education more cost effective for students who would

otherwise have gone abroad Expenses on education abroad are saved by making it

available locally also the cumbersome visa and immigration process can be avoided.

6. Qualitative teaching-learning material : The fourth mode of supply under GATS

(Distance learning, Open and Virtual Universities will enhance the use of modern

communication technology and provide global open access to anyone, anywhere and

anytime.




STRATEGIC DIMENSIONS FOR QUALITY IMPROVEMENT

Economic globalization and liberalization can be achieved if Indian educational

institutions give due attention on enhancement of skills and up gradation of knowledge in

order to match the human resources to the nee of the new international scenario where

employment opportunities of quality improvement which needs the attention of stakeholders

of higher education for the success.

1. infrastructure facilities should be improved with updated international standard having

internet, automated telephone, payment of fees by credit cards, sufficient class rooms and

sports facilities etc.

2. The economy of a country depends upon the utility of the educated man power in the

global context. The kingpins of an institution are its teachers. They would be expected to

be more alert and sensitive to the needs and aspiration of the students and the society.

3. Better transparency and accountability may cause self-appraisal and improvement in

faculty performance.

4. Appointment of super specialized teachers in educational institutions with reasonable

remuneration should be followed.

5. Training the teachers and by conduction orientation courses with a view to adapt to new

changes as the market demands.

6. There should be continuous assessment and counseling. Special attention should be paid

on counseling to guide the face the challenges in their life.

7. Teachers should frame the curriculum with new knowledge with the help of

interdisciplinary interactions. It should be based on societal needs and market demands.

8. Due emphasis to the learning process than teaching process through students participation

is needed.

9. Creation capacity for research and enquiry in colleges should have the highest priority.

Research oriented curriculum should be improved. Project works would be feasible

method of initiating the students thinking and introducing them to reality.

10. Application oriented research must be encouraged Institutions should encourage the

teachers to undertake research projects and consultancy services.

11. Making consultation with industries for services must be followed. Visits to centers of

excellence with better infrastructure and professional talks.\

12. Creating capacity for entrepreneurial and innovative skill must be one of the objectives of

education. Many entrepreneurship courses should be started in the educational

institutions.




13. Working library and active network facilities should be improved in the institutions.

14. Developing a harmonious and integrated personality would just not be possible if system

does not inculcate values of culture, heritage and traditions. Indian heritage, culture and

values need to be thoroughly studied, analyzed and incorporated comprehensively in the

educational system right from the initial stage to higher dimensions of education.

15. Yogic meditation has stood the test of science and medical experiments. It will provide an

insight for character development and spiritual direction.

CONCLUSION

Liberation has opened the gates of education market for meeting competitiveness,

challenges and change. In the wind of globalization, the student is searching for quality

education to enter into global job market, whereas Institutions, teacher, administrative is not

yet geared up to plug off the gap. Many traditional Universities in India still are with their

bad old recruitment, looking State funding indifferent to self financing courses, outdated

examination to self financing courses, outdated examination system, obsolete teaching

methods low standards. Time has ripped and reaching 2005 years, that foreign Universities

are entering into India soil for competitiveness. By all manses, very shortly, new twist and

turns would be seen in higher education system. Education is an important index of human

development. Among various levels of education, higher education has a influential impact

on development. Higher education empowers the individual with necessary skills and

competence for achieving important personal and social goals. Higher education is indeed a

vital tool for intellectual and cultural developments and a mean for achieving wider social

aspirations. Revolution in information technology has brought new challenges of higher

education.

REFERENCES

1. H. Ashok Chandra Prasad and S. George (ed) EXIM Dynamics Services and WTO-An

Indian Perspective, Common Wealth Publishers, New Delhi, 1996.

2. Chauhan, C.P.S, Hr. Education in India : Challenges of Global Trends, University News,

40(17) April 209-May 05 2002.

3. Prof Sunil Kumar Gupta. a lecture delivered by the Professor al I he Silver Jubilee

Celebration held at Senate Hall, ML1 Canchipur on May 10. 2010.




4. Elizabeth Goldsmith and Sue L.T. McGregor(2QQO); E-commerce: consumer protection

issues and implications for research and education; J Consumer Studies & Home

Economics; Vol.24, No.2, June 2000, pp. 124-127.

5. R.C.T.Cheung, New Challenges in Commerce Education, Department of Computing,

Hong Kong Polytechnic University.

6. Dr. KishorMoharir, Higher Education In Commerce-Challenges And Opportunities,

Sardar Patel College, Chandrapur, Volume No.1, Issue No.9 Issn 2277-1166.

7. Munesh Kumar, Hr. Education in India and Emerging Trends, University News, 42(15)

April, 12-18, 2004.

8. A. Ranga Reddy, Higher Needs Speedy Reforms, University News, 42(17) April-26 May-

02, 2004.

9. Bharat E. Sant, Private Participation in Indian Higher Education Towards Excellence in

Teaching & Learning, University News 42(07) Feb. 16-22, 2004.

10. Chalam K.S. (2003) Introduction to Educational Planning & Management, Amol

Publishers, New Delhi.

11. www.lsn.curtin.edu.au

12. www.epw.org.in

13. www.ingentaconnect.com

http://www.lsn.curtin.edu.au/

http://www.epw.org.in/




AVAILABILITY AND MANAGEMENT OF WATER IN THE RIVERS OF RAIGAD

DISTRICT

DR. SAMEER ARUN BUTALA

H.O.D. - Geography

Sundarrao More Arts, Commerce and Science College, Poladpur-Raigad

Abstract : Raigad district have heavy rainfall, also so many rivers flows. Raigad district have

plate slope to the western site because of it have good water availability and with the

availability Raigad district have natural seen and good Geographical landform. In monsoon

season the rivers in Raigad district is always overflow. And it other season there is a

problem to water in Raigad district most of river in Raigad district are to be dry and there is

need to be make river water management. Every year in Raigad district there is a flood.

Most of river is to be overflow. This overflow water is and a disaster of Raigad district, so if

we convert this overflow water to the nearest dam. This overflow water can make over

development of some part of area is means to make river management.

INTRODUCTION

Raigad district is a whole part of the coastal low land. It is drained mostly by short

west word flowing parallel streams originating from the Sahayadri mountain ranges. The

district receives seasonal rainfall from south west monsoon during June to September and the

district have heavy rainfall and good water availability in the rivers and there tributaries. As a

impact of this, every year in the most of Raigad district towns and villages have facing the

problem of flood. This flood desist the routine life of local people during rainy season. Thus

there is a need of systematic study of availability of water and its management in the rivers of

the district.

OBJECTIVES

1. To analyze annual water availability and overflow (flood) water in the district

2. To prepare a digital elevation map of drainage systems for water management

3. To suggest the measures for the river water management in the district.

DATA BASE

The present study is based on the primary as well as secondary data. The primary

data. Primary Data is collected through satellite imageries and observation. Secondary data is




collected from District Gazetteer, District Socio-economic Abstract of Raigad district,

published data of water conservation department, published research articles, Journals, etc.

METHODOLOGY

The data is collected through primary and secondary sources were processed and

represented by statistical and cartographic technique.alsoGIS software is used for analysis of

secondary data and GPS Instrument is used for collecting data of location of river spots.

DRAINAGE

Drainage is the most important compound of physical environment which affects on

agriculture and human life directly and indirectly. Surface water is by far the most important

means for providing sustaining irrigation which stabilized and improves agro economic life

system that has otherwise lengthy of land and potential because of the uncertainty in the flow

of water it is potable that the any attempt to improve the agricultural land use planning with

many problem with the help of shallow deep water table is found in the entire region.

RAIGAD DISTRICT DRAINAGE VIEW MAP

Amba, Savitri, Gandhari, are the main river in the study area. It has flows from

northwest to West direction and a number of tributaries flows entire the region. Patalganga




and Bhogawati is the Sub river is tributary of Amba, Patalganga is originated from Western

part of Khandala..

North Raigad Drainage View Map

In the north of Raigad, between the Nagothna river in the West and the Patalganga in

the east, is a low-lying salt swamp full of winding slimy tidal creeks, into which, about 5

miles from the mouth of the Patalganga, drains alter a course of about 16 miles across the

north-east of Raigad. About five miles further west after a north-west course of about twenty

miles through central Raigad, the Bhogaeshvari, Bhogavati, or North Raigad River, loss itself

in a network of tidal creeks..

South Raigad Drainage View Map

Raigad has six large reservoirs, of which four at Konkan, once at Vasi, and one at

Vadav. The Kasar lake at Raigad district, built without masonary about 1627, had an area of

about six acres. There is much silt, and, at the end of May, only 2 or 3 feet of water remain.




The Khavandal reservoir, built about the same time also without masonry, has an area of

about three acres. At the end of May only two or three feet of water is left. The Chambhar

reservoir, built about 1750, has an area of about five acres and a depth of about seven feet.

The water works reservoir, formed by damming a small valley in the hills near Pen, has an

area of about five acres and a greatest depth about twenty-five feet. There is no silt and it

holds water throughout the year. There is an earth dam finished in 1876 with a puddle wall

several feet thick in the center, faced on the inside with stone pitching. Its water is carried

about half a mile by a line of earthen and iron pipes. The Vasi reservoir, built about 1777, has

an area of thirty acres and a greatest depth of twelve feet. The Vadav reservoir, built in 1862,

has an area of ten acres and a greatest depth of eight feet.

On the three chief Roha reservoirs one is it Ashtami, one at Sangada, and one at

Mehda. The Ashtami lake across the creek from Roha, has an area of about eight acres and a

greatest depth of twenty feet. It holds water throught the year. The Sangads reservoir, about

three miles west of Roha, has an area of about seven acres. It is shallow and its water is used

for cattle drinking. The stone pond at Mehda, about three miles north of Roha, was built in

the time of Peshwa Bajirav II ( 1796-1818 ). [Beside the many smaller ponds are scattered

over the district. In 1854 there were in Angria Kolaba 160 ponds holding water from 5 to 12

months, and varying from 2240 to 112 feet in circumference. Of the whole number 143 were

mere excavations without built sides, ten were in complete repair with stone mortar sites , and

of seven the sides were only partly built. Bom. Gov. Sel. New Series. (1854) VII. 38, 39]

DAM‟S




Special Major Dam:- Bhira, Nathuwadi

Category (01) a) Height more than 30 m. or

b) Storage more than 60 Mm. or

c) Gated Spiliway or

d) Discharge Capacity more than 2000 cum/sec.

General Major Dam:- Shrigaon, Kodgaon, Kavle, Dolvahal,

Category(02) Akoli,wapa,ghoyawade etc.

a) Height more than 15 m

b) Storage more than 15 Mm

c) Discharge capacity more than 200 cum/sec.of

d) Length more than 2000 mt.

1) The above classification is done w.r.t. Dam safety guidelines

2) The Locations of Major Dams shown in this map do not cover all the major project.

ANALYSIS

Raigad district has to bear some responsibilities of economic development in the

upcoming eta. Comparing to other region Raigad district has highest availability of water.

But if we think only about agricultural water except Raigad the remaining Maharashtra has

3000 cubic meter water. Compare to this Raigad has 30,000 cubic meter water availability for

per hector fertile land. It means Raigad has five times more water, for fertile land, than

remaining Maharashtra. These may be question arise in your mind that why we should not

able to utilize this water till now. In this respect we have some technical problems. We know

that in countries like India, nature doesn‟t make available the rain for whole year. It provides

water only for a period of 3 to 4 months. So far full year use, we have to make arrangement

by building dams. So we have to assimilate the scientific technique of dam building, which is

an important step in dam building, without it we can‟t able to increase the availability of

water in our country.

We have some specific problems to store the rain water in Konkan region. Konkan is

a narrow region, It can be divided into three divisions. First one at the lap of Sahyadri,

Second at the foot of Sahyadri and third by the side of the sea. which is plane and where the

rivers and channels are not so deep. Such region covered 20 to 30 K.m. area. The foot of

Sahyadri is nearer to the east side of that region. We cannot build dams at the entrance of the

Channels. Because it will drawn the highly cultivated land of rive farming. So, out of this 50

to 60 k.m. breathe region, we can use only 1/3 part of east to obstruct the water. Though we

have 52 lach hectare.




So though we have 52 heactre lakh meter available water for dam storage but only we

can use 19 lakh hectre meter, which can be converted into 500 cubic meter per head per year.

We have only 7 to 8 lakh hectre cubic meter water for our use and 3.50 to 3.75 lakh hectre for

agriculture. Today in Konkan region 8 lakh hectre land is for farming. But actually 15 lakh

hectre cultivated land is available where we can take crops. So this is another feature of

Konkan region, out of all 30 lakh hectre land near about 15 lakh hectre land is able to

produce various crops. So vast non farming cultivated land is a big challenge to us.

PROBLEMS OF WATER MANAGEMENT

To spread wire network and to take care of it, is a costly process. It can be avoided in

Raigad district by constructing small dams.

CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

Basically Raigad district have more efficient of water and this water is used and

wasted by various reason. Geomorphologic conditions like slop, soil are wasting the water,

even though human nature and his development are wasting the water. Kundalika Savitri,

Patalganga, Gandhari, Kal these River are main Raigad district. In rainy season these river

are flooded but in summer the level of water is very low. When surviving this river I found a

big change in water level in rainy season and summer season. Slop towards the western side

and eastern side of the Raigad district is surrounded hilly region that way we found more

water flows are towards to Arabian Sea. Most of the water is wasted by industrialization and

increasing population. So we can to protect this flooded water. We can seal this flooded water

to western ghat people. The air distance between Savitri and Mulshi dam is only 30 km and

Kundalika and Mulshi dam air distance are also closer. For using P.K. Frankal method . Mr.

P.K. Frankal who is a technological person with GIS and a Director of Irrigation and water

management in USA shows simple method for shifting the water, compared to this method

we can able to generate and shift these river water to Mulsi and Bhatghar dam. While

shifting this flooded water we get so many cannels and water availability in our district which

makes a development in agricultural and industrial area.

REFERENCES

1. Kvamme,K.L. 1983.”Computer Processing Techniques for Regional Modeling of

Archaeological Sire Locations,” Advances in Computer Archaeology,

2. Raftery, A.E. 1995. 1995 “Bayesian Model Selection in Social Research,” Sociological

Methodology.





PROF. DATTATRYA DALVI


New Arts, Commerce & Science College, Parner.

E-mail : [email protected]

Abstract : The development and growth of banking sector in India is considerable and

praiseworthy. Upcoming generation will play an important role in further strengthening the

banking sector. Banking sector has improved the terms and new Technology. Nowadays,

banking sector has offered the new technological services to their customer. Banking sector

also increased the accessibility of a common person to bank for his productivity and

requirements. The innovative banking technology changing reforms have changed the face of

Indian banking sector. The banking system has improve the manifolds in terms of product

and services, technology, banking system, trading facility etc. it is the evident that the

banking system has grown in India to compare with other country.

Keywords: ATM , Electronic Payment System , Real Time Gross Settlement , NEFT , Core

Banking and Mutual Fund etc

INTRODUCTION

The concept Bank is defined by different angles by different experts. Banking in India

was defined under Section 5(A) as "any company whichtransacts banking, business" and the

purpose of banking business defined under Section 5(B),"accepting deposits of money from

public for the purpose of lending or investing, repayable on demand through cheque/draft or

otherwise". In the process of doing the above-mentioned primary functions, they are

also permitted to do other types of business referred to as Utility Services for their customers

(Banking Regulation Act, 1949). Economic Development of any nation is depending on the

development of banking sector. Today in India the banking sector is stronger and capable of

to handling the pressures of competition. There has been considerable innovation and

diversification in the business of major commercial banks. Some of them have engaged in the

areas of consumer credit, credit cards, merchant banking, leasing, mutual funds etc.

OBJECTIVE - Above study has undertaken for the purpose of to study the recent trends in

banking sector.





RESEARCH METHODOLOGY - Secondary information is used in present study which is

collected from following secondary sources.

1. Books

2. Journals

3. Periodicals

4. Websites

DATA ANALYSIS

Following are the recent technological developments in banking sector.

1. Point of Sale Terminal : Point of sale is a new terminal system which is connected online

towards the customers account. During the purchase transaction the customer account is

debited and the seller account is credited.

2. ATM : ATM means Automatic Teller Machine. It is one of the important technological

development in banking sector. We can withdraw or deposit the money without visiting to the

branch with the help of such machine. We can withdraw or deposit the money any time.

Automatic Teller Machine enables the customers to withdraw their money 24 hours a day 7

days a week.

3. Electronic Payment System : This system is come into existence in United States.

Electronic Payment is a financial exchange that takes place online between buyers and

sellers. We can avoid handling cash for transaction with the help of such system.

4. Real Time Gross Settlement : This system is started in India from 2004. Above system is

operated by Reserve Bank of India. Real Time Gross Settlement (RTGS) is an electronic

form of funds transfer where the transmission takes place on a real time basis. In India,

transfer of funds with RTGS is done for high value transactions, the minimum amount being

Rs 2 lakh. The beneficiary account receives the funds transferred, on a real time basis.

5. NEFT (National Electronic Fund Transfer) : National Electronic Funds Transfer

(NEFT) is a nation-wide payment system facilitating one-to-one funds transfer. With the help

of such scheme individuals can electronically transfer funds from any bank to any individual

having an account with any other bank branch in the country participating in the Scheme.

6. Tele Banking : Tele banking means operate individual account with the help of telephone.

In tele banking Automatic Voice Recorder is used for simpler queries and transactions. For

queries and transactions, manned phone terminals are used.

7. Core Banking : Core Banking means a centralized system established by a bank which

allows its customers to conduct their business irrespective of the bank‟s branch. Under this

scheme branches of banks are interlinked with each other.




8. Credit Card : Credit card is a card on which a specific credit is sanctioned by the bank to

the customer. Customer can purchase or make the payment without keeping balance on their

account.

9. Bank Mutual Fund : Number of banks has launched Mutual Fund. Mutual Fund is one of

the professionally managed investment scheme. Under which bank collects amount from the

individual customer and the such amount is invested by the bank in stock market. Attractive

return is given by the bank on such investment.

10. D-Mat Account : D-Mat Account is also on of the recent product launched by the bank.

D-mat account is used for handling the transaction of stock market. Anyone can purchase or

sale the shares and securities on stock market with the help of such account. Specific

commission is charged by the bank on such account. Above all are the recent trends in India

banking sector.

CONCLUSION

The development and growth of banking sector in India is considerable and

praiseworthy. Upcoming generation will play a important role in further strengthening the

banking sector. Banking sector has improved the terms and new Technology. Nowadays,

banking sector has offered the new technological services to their customer. Banking sector

also increased the accessibility of a common person to bank for his productivity and

requirements. The innovative banking technology changing reforms have changed the face of

Indian banking sector. The banking system has improve the manifolds in terms of product

and services, technology, banking system, trading facility etc. it is the evident that the

banking system has grown in India to compare with other country.

REFERENCES

1. Books :

Indian Financial System – by M. Y. Khan

Advance Bank Management- by IIBF

Emerging Trends in Banking Sector – by R. K. Mittal

2. Journals :

International Journal of Current Research

International Journal of Research in Economics and Social Sciences (IJRESS)

3. Periodicals :

Recent Journal of Banking and Finance Articles

Financial Times




4. Websites :

www.mbainfoline.com,

www.internationaljournalssrg.org,

www.abhinavjournal.com,

www.ibef.org,

www.ijsrm.in

http://www.mbainfoline.com/

http://www.internationaljournalssrg.org/

http://www.abhinavjournal.com/

http://www.ibef.org/




LYTOCESTUS MULAANSIS N.SP. FROM FRESHWATER FISH CLARIAS

BATRACHUS FROM MULA DAM AT BARAGAON NANDUR, TALUKA RAHURI,

DISTRICT AHMEDNAGAR, M.S.

R. R. DANDAWATE

Dept. of Zoology,

Arts, Commerce and Science College, Sonai,

Tal.Newasa, Dist- Ahmednagar, M.S.

Email - [email protected]

Abstract : The present study deals survey of cestode parasites from fresh water fishes like

Clarius batrachus from Mula dam at Baragaon nandur in district Ahmednagar during

January 2017 to December 2017.The present communication deals with the new species

Mulaansis from the genus Lytocestus is worm having head long. Testes numerous (450-480)

in numbers. Cirrus pouch small, oval, pre-ovarian, transversally placed, cirrus straight thin,

vagina Medium, coiled tube, vas deferens thin. Genital pores small, oval, obliquely placed.

Ootype is small and oval. Ovary on posterior side, each lobe contains 27-30 ovarian

follicles, two lobes connected to each other by isthmus. Uterus wide convoluted tube filled

with numerous eggs. Uterine pore is small and rounded. Eggs are operculated, oval in shape.

Vitellaria are granular and corticular in position.

Key Words: Lytocestus, Clarias batrachus, Mula dam.

INTRODUCTION

The genus Lytocestus was erected by Cohn (1908) with its type species. L.adhaerens

found in Clarias fuscus in Hong-Kong. This genus was first confirmed by Woodland (1926),

who included four more species in addition to the type species. They are L. filiformes

Woodland (1923) in Mormynus caschive Egyption Sudan L. calmersius (Woodland, 1924), L.

cunnigtoni Fuhrmann and Bear (1925) and L. indicus Moghe (1925) (syn. Caryophyllaeces

indicus) from Clarias batracus in India. The same species was recorded by Mehra (1930)

from Clarias magur and Ramdevi (1973) from Clarias batracus in India, Hunter (1927)

placed the genus in sub-family of his own namely Lytocestinae and retained only three

species i.e. L.adhaerens, L. filiformes and L. indicus. He put the species L. cunningtoni and L.

calmersius in the genus. Monobothrioides. Subsequent work of Gupta (1961), Murhar (1963)

have adhered to these changes. Wardle and McLeod (1952) followed Hunter‟s classification





but raised the status of Lytocestinae from sub-family to family, Wardle, McLeod and

Radinovsky (1974) suggested a new system of classification of cestodes, who used the term

cotyloda as a class and order caryophyllidae is kept in this class MACKIEWICZ (1972)

INCLUDED THE SPECIES L. javanicus (Bovien, 1926), Fartado (1963), Lynsdale (1950)

considered L. alestesi as syn. Of L. barmanicus, Lynsdale (1956), but Mackiewicz (1962)

after examination of original material L. alestesi Lynsdale (1956) concluded that it should be

considerd as synonym of L. filiformis Woodland (1923), Ramdevi (1973) described L.

longicollis from Clarias batrachus in India.

Hiware and Jadhav (1991) in Clarias batrachus. L. teranaensis was erected in 1999

by Kolpuke and Shinde in Wallago attu. Recently L. caryophyllid was added by D.N. Patil

and B.V. Jadhav (Dec. 2002) in the host Clarias batrachus. Later in 2002 Shinde and Pawar

added L. batrachusae. Later in 2004, L. shindei was erected by Khadap, Jadhav and

Suryavanshi. Tandom et. Al. in 2005 erected four new species L. clariae, L. allenuateus, L.

assamensis in Clarias batrachus and L. heteropneustii in Heteropneustes fossilis. Later on no

species is added to this genus.


The present study deals survey of cestode parasites from fresh water fishes like

Clarias batrachus from Mula Dam at BaragaonNandur in district Ahmednagar during

January 2017 to December 2017 and brought in to laboratory. The worms were flattened,

preserved in 4% formalin, stained with Harris hematoxyline, passed through various

alcoholic grades, cleared in xylol, mounted in D.P.X. All drawing was drawn to scale with

the aid of camera lucida and wholemount slides were prepared for anatomical and

morphological studies. All measurements are in millimeter.

DESCRIPTION

One hundred and eleven specimens of the cestode parasites were collected from the

intestine of Clarias batrachus (Linneus, 1758) at at Baragaon nandur, Dist. Ahmednagar,

M.S. India, during the period of Jan 2017 to Dec. 2017. Out of these ten were stained for

taxonomical studies.

The mature, flattened specimens are long and measures 24.20-24.230 mm in length

and 2.90 to 3.20 mm in width. The head is long, well marked off from the body and measures

4.116(4.385-4.847) in length and 1.998(0.727-2.270) in width. The testes are numerous 470

(450-390) in numbers, pre-ovarian, placed centrally, evenly distributed, round to oval in

shape, small in size and measures 0.151(0.121-0.182) in length and 0.103(0.091-0.114) in

width.




The cirrus pouch is small, oval pre-ovarian, transversely placed and measures 0.125

(0.114-0.133) in length and 0.029 (0.025-0.033) in width. The cirrus is straight, thin and

measures 0.056 (0.054-0.060) in length and 0.013(0.005-0.016) in width. Vagina is a long,

coiled tube, starts from genital pores and runs posterior in the body, measures 0.090(0.080-

0.099) in length and 0.015(0.005-0.020) in width. The vas deferens is short, thin and

measures 0.054(0.053-0.057) in length and 0.070(0.010-0.01) in width. Ootype is Medium,

oval, situated in between the ovarian lobes and measures 0.0143(0.114-0.168) in length and

0.125(0.098-0.146) in width.

Ovary is bilobed, present at the posterior region of the body. Each lobe measures

0.352(0.228-0.477) in length and 0.365(0.270-0.460) in width. Each lobe contains 25-28

ovarian follicles. The two lobes are connected to each other by isthmus which measures

0.066(0.047-0.082) in length and 0.380 (0.362-0.388) in width. Uterus is wide, convoluted

tube, widens and filled with numerous eggs open separately outside the body by uterine pore

and measures 0.167(0.159-0.174) in length and 0.035(0.024-0.045) in width. Uterine pore is

medium, rounded and measures 0.038 in diameter.The eggs are operculated oval in shape and

measures 0.181(0.172-0.191) in length and 0.221 (0.210-0.231) in width.Vitellaria are

granular and in position.

Fig: Lytocestus mulaansis n.sp.




A: Anterior region, B: Middle region, C: Posterior region

DISCUSSION

The present worm has head long, well marked off from the body. Testes numerous

average 470 in numbers, per-ovarian, placed centrally, evenly distributed, oval in shape.

Cirrus pouch Medium l, oval, pre-ovarian, transversally placed, cirrus straight thin,vagina

long, coiled tube, vas deferens short, thin. Genital pores small, oval, obliquely placed. Ootype

is small, oval situated between ovarian lobes. Ovary bilobed, on posterior side, each lobe

contains 25-28 ovarian follicles, two lobes connected to each other by isthmus. Uterus wide

convoluted tube filled with numerous eggs. Uterine pore is median and rounded. Eggs are

operculated, oval in shape. Vitellaria are granular and corticular in position.

The present worm differs from L. indicus which is having length of the body 27 to 40

and width of the same 0.30 to 0.50, testes 230-270 in numbers, round in shape, extends up to

the cirrus pouch region, vas deferens followed by ductus ejaculates, ovary with numerous

follicles connected by bagpipe shaped isthumus, the wall of uterus is thick, coiled and

viterallia follicular, in 2-3 rows on each side.The present cestode differs from L. filiformis,

Woodland, 1923 testes is numerous, large rounded in central medulla, ovary bilobed, small

containing 6-11 large follicles connected by spindle shaped isthmus near posterior margin,

vitellaria, follicular, arranged all along testicular and medullary parenchyma, uterus

convoluted, tubular pre-ovarian opens by uterine pore anterior to cirrus pouch.The present

worm differs from L. indicus, Moghe, 1925 Clarias batrachus, India. In testes 230-270,

rounded up to cirrus sac. Some are at lateral side, ovary with numerous follicles connected by

big pipe shaped isthmus. Vitellaria small, corticular, rounded in 2-3 round on each lateral

side.The parasite differs from L. alestei, Lynsdale, 1956 in testes more or less spherical ovary

is bilobed to the posterior side of the body. Vitellaria extend from short distance behind most

anterior. Testes upto the anterior tip of the body.The present parasite differs from L.

biramanicus, Lynsdale, 1956, in testes medullary, extend up to genital pores. Ovary wing like

with numerous follicles. Uterus consist of number of loose cells, the most anterior loop

reaching the space between the two genital openings, vitellaria up to the utero-vaginal

pore.The present cestode differs from L. longicollis, Ramdevi, 1973 which is having the

length 10.8-20.0 and width 0.50-0.84, neck long 5.3-5.6, testes 105-140 in numbers,

spherical, broadly oval in shape, cirrus pouch oval in shape, vas deferens much convoluted,

ovary „H‟ shaped and vitellaria corticular, large, all around, testes extending from the base of

the neck to the anterior tip of the ovary, in 1-2 rows on each lateral side.The present worm




differs from L. fossilis, Singh, 1975 in having sucker stumpy neck long, testes numerous,

cirrus pouch oval, ovary follicular „H‟ shaped, vagina and seminal receptaculum absent,

uterus completely coiled, uterine coils behind ovarian isthmus. Extension or vitellaria up to

posterior end of body. The present parasite differs from L. marathwadensis , Shinde and

Phad, 1988 in arranged in 2or3 rows; cirrus pouch large, ovary „H‟ shaped, vitellaria small

and oval, single row on lateral side, uterus secular.The present worm differs from L. alii,

Jadhav and Gavhane, 1991in scolex bluntly rounded, cirrus coiled, number of testes 460-480,

uterus convoluted tube. The present wall differs from L. clariasae, jadhav and Gavhane, 1991

in scolex bluntly rounded, ovary bilobed like bunch of grapes, number of testes 700-750.The

present tapeworm differs from L. naldurgensis, Kadam, Hiware and Jadhav et. al., 1991 in

scolex conical, blunt spatulate, neck short, testes 500-600 in number, scattered in medullary

region, cirrus pouch small, oval, vertical and obliquely placed, ovary bilobed, butterfly

shaped, vagina wide tube, uterus wide tube, convoluted, vitellaria follicular, smaller in 3-4

rows. The present worm differs from L. teranaensis, Kolpuke and Shinde, 1999 in testes

numerous, round about, 1200-1500, pre-ovarian. Ovary bilobed, large, each lobe

triangular.The present worm differs from L. caryophyllid, Patil and Jadhav, 2002 in head long

well marked off from body. Testes numerous, 1425-1475 in numbers, pre-ovarian, evenly

distributed, scattered in single field, small oval. Cirrus sac small, oval, pre-ovarian, obliquely

placed and ovary bilobed, butterfly shaped, vagina long coiled. Uterus wide, convoluted,

transversly situated, filled with eggs. The present cestode differs from L. batrachusae in head

spatulate, neck long, wide, gonads situated in the posterior region or the worm, testes

medium, round pre-ovarian 3800-4000 in numbers, cirrus pouch large ablong, pre-ovarian,

ovary bilobed, butterfly shaped, lobes with irregular margins, vagina wide tube, runs

medially, ootype medium, oval, runs posterior to isthmus; genital pores small, oval, central in

position, vitellaria small, oval arranged in two rows.The present parasite differs from L.

shindei, Khadp, Jadhav and Suryavanshi, 2004 in testes about 350-360, ovary bilobed,

butterfly shaped near posterior region, uterus wide, convoluted tube transversly situated,

filled with numerous eggs, vitellaria granular and corticular.The present worm differs from L.

nagapurensis, Shinde et. al., 2004 in having spatulate scolex, neck short, broader than long,

testes 1100-1150, oval, vas deferens medium, thin, coiled, cirrus pouch medium, ovary

bilobed with numerous oval follicles, connected by isthmus, vagina long, thin tube.The

present worm differs from L. clariae, Tandon, 2005 in testes oval about 270-495 in numbers,

ovary bilobed „H‟ shaped and vitelline follicles ovoid, pre-ovarian in two rows.The present

parasite differs from L. attenuates, Tandon et. al. 2005 in having testes 155-398, ovary




bilobed and follicular inverted „A‟ shaped. Vitallaria ovoid, pre-ovarian arranged in two

ropws.The present worm is differs from L. assamensis, Tandon et. al., 2005 in testes large,

about 266-565 in numbers, ovary bilobed, inverted „A‟ shaped, vitalline follicles cortical. The

present parasite differs from L. heteropneustii, Tondon et. al., 2005 in testes ovoid, large

about 235-340 in numbers, ovary bilobed, vitelline follicles ovoid, spherical, cortical in

deposition.

CONCLUSION

The above noted characters are valid enough to accommodate these worms as a new

species Lytocestus Mulaansis n. sp. Named after the well known Mula dam which is large

damof Ahmednagar District ,Ms India from where the author collected the worm.The

presenr worm causes ill effect on the health of fishes in higher infection

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

The authors are grateful to Principal, Arts, Commerce and Science College Sonai,

Dist- Ahmednagar for providing laboratory and library facilities during the course of study.

REFERENCES

1. Al KAWARI, KALTHAM, S.R. AND MOSTAFA M. RAMADAN, J.W “Biodiversity

of helminth parasites of Fishes in the Arabian Gulf with special reference to digentic

trematodes a cestode” Qutar Uni. Sci., J. 141-153.,1994.

2. CHINCHOLIKAR L.N. AND SHINDE G.B, “ On a new species of Circumoncobothrium

shindei”, 1986 from freshwater fish, M.U.J. Sci. No. Sci. 16(9):183-188.,1976.

3. FRANTISEK MORAVEC,”Common sculpin Cotto gobio as a natural paratenic host of

Proteocephalus longiclis(Cestoda: Proteociphalidae), a parasite of salmonids, in Europe”.

Dis. Aquat. Org. 45:155-158.,2001.

4. HIWARE C.J. AND JADHAV B.V.,”Intestinal histopathology of Clarias batrachus

(Linn.) parasitized by Caryophyllaeid cestode. J.Inland Fish. Soc." India, 34(2): 30-

35.,2002.

5. HIWARE C.J.,”The occurance of cestode parasites collected from some freshwater fishes

of Maharashtra state”, India, Trends Research in Science and Technology2(1): 31-

38.,2010.




6. ANIRBAN ASH AND TOMAS SCHEOLZ,”Tape worm (Cestode :Caryaphyllideo)

parasite of Claries batrachus (Pisces; siluriformes) in the Indomalayan

region”.J.Parasitology 97(3),2011 435-438.,2011.

7. DESHMUKH V.H., NANAWARE S.S., SHINDE S.M. AND BHURE D.B “Studies on

prevalence of cestode parasites of freshwater fishes from Nanded region(M.S.)

India”,.Indian J. of Appl. Res. Vol:III, I:10,2013.




IMPORTANCE OF SOIL AND WATER ANALYSIS IN RECENT AGRICULTURE –CASE

STUDY OF SANGAMNER TAHSIL

SANGITA DANDWATE

SMBST College Sangamner,Ahmed nagar 422605.

Abstract : During the last few decades agricultural production increased due to the use of

high yielding varieties and chemical fertilizers. The fertilizer production and green revolution

are directly related with the better yielding crops for increasing food production. The

demand for fertilizer production is increasing all over the world. In this process India has

become the fourth biggest fertilizer producing country (Swaminathan, 1985). In recent years

agriculture development has been changed from conventional and traditional farming

method too more intensive practices using chemical fertilizers and pesticides with irrigation

facilities. Continuous use of chemical fertilizers slowly changed soil properties, ultimately

the production in long run is reduced. It has resulted in leaching of chemical into the surface

and ground water. Due to increasing demand for cash crops the practice of monoculture

cropping pattern have further helped to deteriorate water as well as soil quality. Therefore, it

is essential to evolve and adopt a strategy of integrated nutrient supply by using a

combination of chemical fertilizers, organic manures and biofertilizers.

So soil and water analysis is an important to know the wealth of soil.

Ker word: Soil and water.

INTRODUCTION

Sangamner area is located in the northern part of the Ahmednagar district of

Maharashtra State. The Sangamner tahsil lies between 180 36' N and 1901‟ N latitude and

between 740 1' W and 740 56' W longitude .

The Sangamner town is located on the confluence streams of Pravara and the

Mhalungi river which is at a distance of 150 km from Pune, on Pune-Nasik National

Highway No. NH-50. The area is drained by the Pravara river, which originates in the hilly

region of Western Ghats at Ratangarh. Geologically, basalts underlay the Pravara basin. In

general the climate is dry and hot the average maximum temperature during summer is as

high as 420C in month of May and average minimum temperature falls up to 100 C during

the month of December. The area receives rainfall, chiefly from the south waste monsoon




between June and September as the area falls under the rain shadow zone of Western Ghat

and receives very low precipitation, annual rainfall ranging from 290 to 594 mm.

MATERIAL AND METHOD

In all 75 soil samples were collected from entire study area out of 25 soil samples

from lift irrigated area, 25 from rainfed area and 25 from agrobased industrial effluent were

collected during summer 2011

While collecting soil samples the upper layer of vegetation, surface litter, stones

stubble if any were cleared away and then layer of soil immediately below (0-15 cm) was

collected in cotton cloth bag. The dried soil samples were pounded in wooden mortar and

pestle and sieved through 2 mm sieve. The sieved soil samples were used for physical and

chemical analysis.

Water samples were collected from wells and tube wells fifteen irrigation water

samples were collected also same area. The plastic bottle were thoroughly washed, cleaned

and rinsed before every collection.

RESULT AND DISCUSSION

In general, the soil in the area is medium to high in fertility. Pravara and Mula rivers

bank soils were dominated by medium black to black cotton soil with sandy clay loam texture

known as garden soils. The chemical analysis of water from lift irrigation, rainfed area and

agrobased industrial effluent areas showed the alkaline pH of irrigation water from lift

irrigation area (8.14) and agrobased industrial effluent area (8.39), The electrical

conductivity of irrigation water from lift irrigation area, rainfed area and agrobased industrial

area were low and within safe limit (1.76, 0.63 and 1.81 dSm-1 respectively) .

The calcium, magnesium, sodium, potassium, chlorides and sodium absorption ratio

of irrigation water from lift irrigation area, rainfed area and agrobased industrial area were

within safe limit. Residual sodium carbonate content of irrigation water from lift irrigation

area, rainfed area and agrobased industrial areas showed negative values

QUALITY OF IRRIGATION WATER

The irrigation water from lift irrigation area and rainfed area were alkaline in reaction

(pH 8.14 and 8.39). It was slightly alkaline in agrobased industrial area (7.57). The electrical

conductivity of irrigation water from lift irrigation area and agrobased industrial area were

within safe limit (1.76, 0.63 and 1.81 dSm-1respectively). The total solid content was higher




in lift irrigation area (1127.11 mgl-1) agrobased industrial effluent area (1116.97 mgl-1) and

less in rainfed area (558.93 mgl-1).

The calcium, magnesium, sodium, potassium, chloride, sodium adsorption ratio of

water from lift irrigation area and agrobased effluents area were in safe limit. The residual

sodium carbonate content of irrigation water was with negative values in lift irrigation area,

rainfed area and agrobased industrial effluents area.

Soil and water are the prime important natural resources in cultivation of crops. These

resources are highly interactive and can affect the behaviour and response of agroeco

systems. There is growing pressure on land and water by paramounting growth of

urbanization, metropolitan cities, and industrialization and growing population

The soils from lift irrigation areas were clayey to clay loam texture and higher maximum

water holding capacity.The soil of rainfed areas were clay loam to silty clay loam texture

with moderate water holding capacity.The soils from agrobased industrial effluent areas were

of clay loam texture and high water holding capacity.

The clay per cent, sand per cent and water holding capacity showed significant

negative correlation in lift irrigation area. The soil from lift irrigation area was alkaline in

reaction with medium content of available nitrogen and high in phosphorus and potassium.

Rainfed area soils were of high calcium carbonate, medium available nitrogen and

phosphorus and low in available potassium.Agrobased industrial area was higher in pH and

electrical conductivity, medium available nitrogen and high available potassium and

phosphorus content.

REFERENCES

1. Bharambe,P.R. and Ghonsilkar, C.P. 1985. Physico –chemical characreristics of soils in

Jayakwadi Command.J.Maharashtr agric.univ.10:247-249.

2. Bhattacharya, P.and ghose, G.2001.Phosphorous use efficiency in brinjal with FYM and

Sulpher.J. Indian Soc.Soils Sci. 49(3):456-462.

3. Biswas, B.C., Yadav, D.S. and Maheshwari, S. 1985. Role of calcium and magnisium in

Indian agriculture. A Rev., ferti. News, 30: 15-35.

4. Brar, B. S. and Bajwar, M. S.1996. Soil sodification as influenced by salinity and various

ratios of bicarbonate to calcium and magnesium in irrigation water. J. Indian Soc. Soil

Sci. 44(2): 353 - 356.




5. Challa, O.B., Bhaskar, P., Anantwar, S.G. and Gaikwad, M.S. 2000. Characterization and

classification of some problematic vertisols in semi-arid ecosystem of Maharashtra

plateau. J.Indian Soc. Soil Sci. 48 (1): 139-145.

6. Chopra, S.L. and Kanwar, J.S. 1991. Analytical agricultural Chemistry. Kalyani publi;

New Delhi, Ludhiana

7. Dahama, A.K. 2002. Organic farming, an overview for sustainable agriculture. Second

Enlarged Edition. Agrobios (India) Jodhpur.

8. Daji,J.A.1998.A textbook of soil Science. Media promoters and public. Bombay.pp1-365

9. Gaikwad, R.M. and Wani, P.V. 2001. Response of Brinjal (Cv Krishna) to phosphate

solubilizing biofertilizers.j. maharashtra agric.Uni 26(1):29-32

10. De,P.K. 1939. The roll of blue-green algae in nitrogen fixation in rice fields.

Proc.Roy Sac.London 127B:129-139

11. Goyal,S.K., Singh,B., Nagpal ,V.and Marwaha, T. S.1997. An improved method for

production of algal biofertilizer Ind.J. Agric. Sci. 67(7):314-15

12. Kanwar,J.S.1997.J,Indian Soc.Soil Sci 45:417-428

13. Kaushik,B.D.1996. Consoildated Report,Mission Mode Project on technology

Development and Demonstration of Algal Biofertilizer, IARI,New Delhi,India.

14. Kaushik B.D.and Venkataraman, G.S.1983.Response of cyanobacterial nitrogen fixation

to insectside,Current Science,52(7);321-323.

15. Sat Pal and Saimbhi , M.S. 2003. Effect of varying levels of nitrogen and phosphorous

on earliness and yield of brinjal hybrids (Solanum melongena L.). Res .on crops.4(2):217

16. Singh, R. N. 1961. The role of blue green algae in nitrogen economy of Indian

Agriculture. I. C. A. R., New Delhi, (India), pp. 175.




ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND HEALTH EDUCATION

S. M. GAIKWAD

Director of Physical Education& Sports,

New Arts, Commerce & Science College, Parner,

Tal. Parner, Dist. Ahmednagar – 414 302.

ABSTRACT : Environment means whatever surrounds the human beings, where the human

interact with the environment constantly. Theseinteractions affect quality of life. It is also

known as external environment which includes the air, water, soil, noise, sun radiations,

plants, deserts, rocks, buildings, industries etc. On the other hand, everyone has internal

environment which consists of his body, his internal systems and their functions. The body

maintains balance between the external and the internal environment, but sometimes the state

of balance is disturbed due to the environment pollution and disease are caused.

Environment is polluted when some foreign bodies enter in it and affects the life of humans.

These foreign substances degrade the quality of water, air, noise and many other factors. To

over-come the said factors humans should be physically fit, because healthy people constitute

a healthy nation. It is necessary to explain the meaning of health as it is not merely absence

of disease but much more.

Key Words: Environment, Health, Degrade, Polluted

OBJECTIVES OF HEALTH EDUCATION

Three main objectives are.

1. Informing the people

2. Motivating the people

3. Guiding into people

WHY IS ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH IMPORTANT

The strengthof a nation rest upon the health of its people and future of the health and

the people, improve and present the health. A health is a fundamental human right. To be

good man is like first require is success in life and to be a nation of healthy is the first

condition is national prosperity. The natural question that arises is what health is? And on

what it depends?




The dictionary meaning of health is “freedom from disease, sound body and mind etc.

that condition in which functions of body and mind one duly discharged”. Health is the

ability of the body to sustain adaptive effort and is used to imply body power, vitality and

ability to resist fatigue. Health is sometimes considered as the total outcome of the organic,

neuromuscular interpretive and emotional development. Health is means greatest wealth,

he who has health must cherish it with care,last he should lose it. To this end he must have

adequate knowledge of how tolive healthy. Health is not merelyabsence of disease. Health is

state of complete physical, mental, and social wellbeing and not merely an absence of disease

or infirmity”. “Health is that state in which the individual is able to mobilize all his resources

intellectual, emotional and physical, for optimum daily living”. Recently this definition has

been amplified and it has been added. “Attainment of a level of health that will enable every

individual to lead a sociality and economically productive life”

-World Health Organization

DIMENSIONS OF HEALTH

Authorities are associated with the field of health have recognized dimensions of

health are. Physical dimension, Mental dimension, Social dimension, Emotional dimension,

Spiritual dimension, Vocational dimension, Educational dimension, Nutritional dimension,

Environmental dimension, Curative & Preventive dimension.

ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH RISKS

Here the term „environmental health‟ refers to many different factors in a person‟s

surroundings. Generally speaking, environmental health risks include problem with.

Air pollution - smog, wood smoke and mould,

Water pollution – gray water, lake water, fluoridation, and drought

Food quality – contamination and nutrition.

Chemicals – pesticides, farm chemicals, etc.

Metals – exposures to lead

Diseases from animal and insects (vector born) – dengue fever, hendra virus, Ross River

fever and malaria

Infection disease – viral infections like swine flu

Natural hazardous – solar radiation and extreme weather events

Man Made structures – exposure toasbestos or electromagnetic radiation sources like

mobile phones




Occupational health – safety issues relating to the workplace such as noise pollution and

hazardous waste

Chemical change – higher sea levels, increased soil salinity and increased temperatures.

REMEDIAL MEASURES

„Health education and Sports for All‟ should be compulsory. For Air pollution-

containment, Replacement, Dilution, Legislation, International action, should be followed

Save Ozone layer ; Save earth For water pollution- treatment of waste water ( Sewage &

industrial waste water)population control, Educative manner. To control noise pollution-

effectively prohibitory laws should be introduced. For eg- excessive noise can be recognized

as a crime under section 268 of IPC, the provisions made under motor vehicles Act can be

effectively implemented. Improvement in designing machines, banning pressure horns,

improving road systems

CONCLUSION

Health education provides the scientific facts of community hygiene that could be

help in preventing and eradicating many diseases and remove ignorance. Health education

programmes are basically of preventive and promotive nature. As prevention is better than

cure, such programmes are very important in transmitting the knowledge.Making the people

aware of various dreaded diseases, occurrence of which could be easily avoided. In this way,

health education will play an important role in eliminating many problems that adversely

affect young people, adults, and society in general.

REFERENCES

1. Dr. Ajmer Singh, Dr. Jagdish Bains, Dr. Jagtar Gill, Dr. R.S. Brar, Dr. Nirmalgit Rathee,-

Essentials of Physical Education, Kalyani Publishers, B-I/ 292, Rajinder Nagar,

Ludhiana-141 008

2. Sainai L.D., Sharma R.C.-Kalyani‟s Environmental Education-Kalyani Publishers, B-I/

292, Rajinder Nagar, Ludhiana-141 008

3. www.betterhealth.vic.gov.au/bhcv2/bhcarticles.nsf/pages/Enviromental_health




PHYSICO-CHEMICAL ANALYSIS (HARDNESS OF WATER) OF MAJALGAON

DAM WATER, MAJALGAO, DIST.BEED(M.S.)

V. M. JAYSINGPURE

Sunderrao Solanke Mahavidyalaya,

Majalgaon, Dist.Beed (M.S.).

ABSTRACT : A report of physic-chemical parameter of the water samples taken from the

Majalgaon Dam near Beed District of Maharashtra is presented here. The study of physico-

chemical analysis like pH,TDS, hardness, conductivity,dissolved oxygen and chemical oxygen

demand has been done. The study of these water sample has given the information regarding

the suitability of water for drinking and other domestic applications.

Key words: Physico-chemical parameters, domestic, water characteristics.

INTRODUCTION

Hard water is water that has high mineral content (in contrast with "soft water").

Water hardness is important to fish culture and is a commonly reported aspect of water

quality. It is a measure of the quantity of divalent ions (for this discussion, salts with two

positive charges) such as calcium, magnesium and/or iron in water. There are many different

divalent salts; however, calcium and magnesium are the most common sources of water

hardness. Hardness is traditionally measured by chemical titration. The hardness of a water

sample is reported in milligrams per liter (same as parts per million, ppm) as calcium

carbonate (mg/l CaCO3). Calcium carbonate hardness is a general term that indicates the

total quantity of divalent salts present and does not specifically identify whether calcium,

magnesium and/or some other divalent salt is causing water hardness. Hardness can be a

mixture of divalent salts. In theory, it is possible to have water with high hardness that

contains no calcium. Calcium is the most important divalent salt in fish culture water.

MATERIAL AND METHODS

The experiment was conducted at dept. of zoology, Sunderrao Solanke

Mahavidyalaya, Majalgaon, Dist.Beed(M.S.) on the sample collected from dam.




PHYSICO-CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The physico-chemical tests included the determination of temperature, turbidity,

odour, color, total solid, total dissolved solid, total suspended solid, pH, conductivity, iron

content, acidity, total hardness, and chloride content using the methods of FAO (1997a).

METHODOLOGY

pH was measured with the help of pH meter (Model no. 101 E) of Electronic India ,

standardized with pH buffer 4,7 and 9.2. TDS was estimated by evaporation method at 1800

C, Alkalinity, Hardness, D.O., Chloride, CO2 and all parameters were analyzed by standard

procedure mentioned in APHA (1995). The elemental analysis carried out by digital flame

photometer.

OBSERVATION

Reading of water quality parameters of Majalgaon dam.

Params pH T.D.S T.H. Cal.

Hard. D.O. Cl Alk. Co2 Na K

sample

water

7.2

±.0

0c

145±2

.8e

235±.

11d

106±2

.3c

3.6±.

00d

83±1.

1d

110±5.

77b

7.92±.0

02a

25±.0

0b

6±.0

0c

DISCUSSION

The value of pH 7.2 is in the prescribed limit of ICMR. A little bit increase in pH

level may depress the effectiveness of the disinfectants like chlorinations thereby requiring

the additional chlorines. The value of total dissolved solid is in the prescribed limit of ICMR

it is due to high dissolved salts of Ca, Mg and Fe it requires specific cation and anion

analysis. Total hardness 235 is in the prescribed limit. Calcium hardness 106 mg/l and

dissolved oxygen 3.6 mg/l indicates nearly pure symptoms. Chlorine content is 83 and

alkalinity 110 mg/l is in the prescribed limit. Alkalinity is the cause of carbonate and

bicarbonate ion and its salts. Carbon dioxide is 7.92 ppm. According to Henry‟s law the

gaseous dissolution has been determined by partial pressure of gases, soluble salt content and

ambient temperature. Increase in CO2 content may be by high dissolved salt contents. One

more possibility is there that is the degradation of DOC (dissolved organic carbon).Higher

DOC on post disinfectant application causes some DBPs (Disinfection byproducts) like THM




(Trihalomethanes),HAA (Haloaceticacids) etc. Some of them are potential carcinogens, and a

short-term exposure can lead to dizziness, headaches, as well as to problems associated with

the central nervous system. so it is more relevant for those areas where OM contaminations

are high with high use of disinfectants. Quality of ground water under study is nearly fit for

drinking purpose, but it is recommended that ground water analysis should be carried out

from time to time to monitor the rate and kind of contamination along with analysis of DBPs

to corroborate the present study.

REFERENCES

1. APHA. (1995). Standard Methods for the examination of water and wastewater, Pg 2-4,

29-179. American Public Health Association

2. Ballester, F. and Sunyer, J. (2000). Drinking water and gastrointestinal disease, need of

better understand and an improvement in public health surveillance. Journal of Epidemiol

Community Health 54: 3-5.

3. Bhandari N S and Pande R K, Solute Dynamics of River Sarju in the Central Himalayas,

India, In Ecology of the Mountain Waters, Bhatt S.D. and Pande R.K. Ashish Pub. New

Delhi, 1991, 104-124.

4. Bhoi D K, Raj D S, Metha Y M, Chauhan M B and Machhar M T, Asian J. Chem, 2005,

17404.

5. Gupta, B. K. and R. R. Gupta. (1999). Physio-chemical and biological study of drinking

water in Satna, Madhya Pradesh. Poll. Res. 18: 523-525

6. Garg D K, Goyal R N and Agrawal V P, Ind. J. Envir. Prot. 1990, 10(5), 355-359.

7. Mayur C Shah, Prateek Shilpkar and Sangita Sharma, Asian J Chem. 2007, 19(5), 3449-

3454.

8. Mitali Sarkar, Abarna Banerjee, Partha Pratim Parameters and Sumit Chakraborty, J.

Indian Chem. Soc., 2006, 83, 1023-1027.

9. Rajas Kara Pandian, M., G. Sharmila Banu, G. Kumar and K. H. Smila. (2005). Physico-

chemical characteristics of drinking water in selected areas of Namakkal town (Tamil

Nadu), India. Indian J. Environmental Protection, Vol. 10, No. 3: 789-792

10. Rao S.M and Mamatha P, Curr. Sci. 2004, 87, 942.

11. Thakare S. B., A. V. Parvate and M. Rao. (2005). Analysis of fluoride in the ground water

of Akola district. Indian J. Environ. and Ecoplan. Vol. 10 No.3: 657-661





DR. KHAIRNAR KEWAL TRYAMBAK

M.G.V.'s, Loknete Vyankatrao Hiray Arts, Science & Commerce College,

Panchavati, Nashik-03

E mail: [email protected] Cell No-9423543510

INTRODUCTION

Today, we are having a fairly well developed banking system with different classes of

banks –public sector banks, foreign banks, private sector banks –both old and new

generation, regional rural banks and co-operative banks with the Reserve Bank of India as the

fountain Head of the system. In the banking field, there has been an unprecedented growth

and diversification of banking industry has been so stupendous that it has no parallel in the

annals of banking anywhere in the world. The banking industry has experienced a series of

significant transformations in the last few decades. Among the most important of them is the

change in the type of organizations that dominate the landscape. Since the eighties, banks

have increased the scope and scale of their activities and several banks have become very

large institutions with a presence in multiple regions of the country.' The paper examines the

new trends in commercial banking.

The Banking sector has been immensely benefited from the implementation of

superior technology during the recent past, almost in every nation in the world. Productivity

enhancement, innovative products, speedy transactions seamless transfer of funds, real time

information system, and efficient risk management are some of the advantage derived

through the technology. Information technology has also improved the efficiency and

robustness of business processes across banking sector. India's banking sector has made rapid

strides in reforming itself to the new competitive business environment. Indian banking

industry is the midst of an IT revolution. Technological infrastructure has become an

indispensable part of the reforms process in the banking system, with the gradual

development of sophisticated instruments and innovations in market practices.

Key worlds – e-banking, digital economy, Electronic Payment


The objectives of the research paper are as below:

1. To know the concept of E-Banking.





2. To Study of Recent Trends in Banking Industry.


The primary source of data collection in this research paper is the secondary data. The

available information on E-Banking has been extensively used to complete the research

report. All the available Journals, Related books, Web, Articles, Publish and unpublished

information and Papers provided necessary information to the finalize the research paper.

DEFINITION

"It‟s hard to beat e-banking for the 24-hour convenience it offers Internet-literate

customers". E-banking is a product designed for the purposes of online banking that enables

you to have easy and safe access to your bank account. E-banking is a safe, fast, easy and

efficient electronic service that enables you access to bank account and to carry out online

banking services, 24 hours a day, and 7 days a week.

IT IN BANKING

Indian banking industry, today is in the midst of an IT revolution. A combination of

regulatory and competitive reasons has led to increasing importance of total banking

automation in the Indian Banking Industry. The bank which used the right technology to

supply timely information will see productivity increase and thereby gain a competitive edge.

To compete in an economy which is opening up, it is imperative for the Indian Banks to

observe the latest technology and modify it to suit their environment. Information technology

offers a chance for banks to build new systems that address a wide range of customer needs

including many that may not be imaginable today. Everyone today is convinced that the

technology is going to hold the key to future of banking. The achievements in the banking

today would not have make possible without IT revolution. Therefore, the key point is while

changing to the current environment the banks has to understand properly the trigger for

change and accordingly find out the suitable departure point for the change.

Real Time Gross Settlement (RTGS)

Real Time Gross Settlement system, introduced in India since March 2004, is a

system through which electronics instructions can be given by banks to transfer funds from

their account to the account of another bank. The RTGS system is maintained and operated

by the RBI and provides a means of efficient and faster funds transfer among banks

facilitating their financial operations. As the name suggests, funds transfer between banks

takes place on a 'Real Time' basis. Therefore, money can reach the beneficiary




instantaneously and the beneficiary's bank has the responsibility to credit the beneficiary's

account within two hours.

Automatic Teller Machine (ATM)

Automatic Teller Machine is the most popular devise in India, which enables the

customers to withdraw their money 24 hours a day 7 days a week. It is a devise that allows

customer who has an ATM card to perform routine banking transactions without interacting

with a human teller. In addition to cash withdrawal, ATMs can be used for payment of utility

bills, funds transfer between accounts, deposit of cheques and cash into accounts, balance

enquiry etc.

Tele Banking

Tele Banking facilitates the customer to do entire non-cash related banking on

telephone. Under this devise Automatic Voice Recorder is used for simpler queries and

transactions. For complicated queries and transactions, manned phone terminals are used.

Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) Electronic Data Interchange is the electronic exchange of

business documents like purchase order, invoices, shipping notices, receiving advices etc. in a

standard, computer processed, universally accepted format between trading partners. EDI can

also be used to transmit financial information and payments in electronic form.

Management Information System (MIS)

A management information system (MIS) is a subset of the overall internal controls of

a business covering the application of people, documents, technologies, and procedures by

management accountants to solve business problems such as costing a product, service or a

business-wide strategy. Management information systems are distinct from regular

information systems in that they are used to analyze other information systems applied in

operational activities in the organization. Academically, the term is commonly used to refer

to the group of information management methods tied to the automation or support of human

decision making, e.g. Decision Support Systems, Expert systems, and Executive information

systems. It has been described as, "MIS' lives' in the space that intersects technology and

business. MIS combines tech with business to get people the information they need to do

their jobs better/faster/smarter. Information is the lifeblood of all organizations - now more

than ever. MIS professionals work as systems analysts, project managers, systems

administrators, etc., communicating directly with staff and management across the

organization."




MICR Technology

MICR characters are printed using an ink laden with iron oxide particles. Iron oxide

has magnetic properties and can retain magnetic fields when it is applied on it. The working

of a MICR reader is essentially based on the concept of moving characters printed with this

magnetic ink over two magnetic heads, one that charges the characters and the second one

that immediately follows the first and reads the Magnetic charge. The pattern of the electrical

field is what determines the character being read. The characteristic shape of the MICR font

is designed to give a unique electrical signature pattern to each character which can be easily

recognized by the machine with minimum ambiguity and maximum tolerance. Another

related topic of interest is the very common bar code we so of tensee on items on the shelves

of a supermarket. Bar coding utilizes a technique is similar to Morse code – a series of

narrow and wide bars make up for one character. The reader contains a photo diode and a

light/laser source. The photo diode measures the intensity of light as the light source is moved

across the bar code. The waveform of reflected light thus produced is decoded to read the

contents.

CONCLUSION

The banking today is re-defined and re-engineered with the use of Information

Technology and it is sure that the future of banking will offer more sophisticated services to

the customers with the continuous product and process innovations. Thus, there is a paradigm

shift from the seller's market to buyer's market in the industry and finally it affected at the

bankers level to change their approach from "conventional banking to convenience banking"

and "mass banking to class banking". The shift has also increased the degree of accessibility

of a common man.

REFERENCES

1. S.B. Verma ; E-Banking and Development of Banks, Deep & Deep Publications, New

Delhi ,2008

2. Kamlesh Bajaj & Dehjaji ; E-Commerce,Tata McGraw hill publications Co. Ltd., New

Delhi,2005

3. Various issues of Business week , The Economist , Business Today , The Economic times

and Financial Express .

4. Devlin, J. F. (1995). Technology and Innovation in Retail Banking Distribution.

5. International Journal of Bank Marketing,

6. Al-Sukkar and Hasan H. (2005) “Toward a Model for the Acceptance of Internet Banking

in Developing Countries”, Information Technology for Development,Vol. 11,




CHARACTERIZATION OF WHEAT (TRITICUM AESTIVUM L.)

UNDER WATER STRESS CONDITIONS

S. L. KHAPKE

Department of Botany,

New Arts, Commerce and Science College, Parner -414302 (M. S.)


ABSTRACT : A study was conducted to characterize the morphological and biochemical

parameters in wheat during FC (Field Capacity) percent treatment at the seedling and

anthesis stage. Wheat cultivar (var.496) was subjected to water stress (FC) percent treatment

in pot culture. The study revealed that root length, shoot length, plant height, stem girth,

number of leaves and leaf area decreased with increasing water stress at seedling and

anthesis stage in the wheat. The concentration of proline increased significantly with an

increase in the degree of water stress. Similarly phenolic contents also increased along with

increased water stress level. However, photosynthetic pigments were highly reduced with

increasing water stress at seedling and anthesis stage.

Key words: wheat, water stress, growth study, proline, phenol and chlorophyll.

INTRODUCTION

Wheat (Triticum aestivum L.), a member of family poaceae, is an important cereal for

staple food. It plays an important role in human nutrition and agriculture economy of country.

Food security in the world is challenged by increasing food demand and threatened by

declining water availability (Zwart and Bastiaanssen 2004). Water deficit is considered to be

among the most severe environmental stresses and the major constraint on plant productivity:

losses in crop yield due to water stress probably exceed the loss from all other causes

combined. The deficit has an evident effect on plant growth that depends on both severity and

duration of the stress (Araus et al. 2002; Bartel and Souer 2004). The ability of a cultivar to

produce high and satisfactory yield over a wide range of stress and non-stress environments is

very important (Ahmad et al. 2003). Reduction in soil moisture affects plant metabolism,

resulting in reduced growth, principally due to development of low osmotic pressure in the

roots and leaves. Shangguan and Chen (1991) reported inhibition in leaf elongation and leaf

area in wheat under water stress. Shah et al. (2004) reported that soil moisture stress as a

major constrain limiting all the morphophysiological, biochemical and yield attributing





parameters. In wheat the chlorophyll content decreased with increasing water stress in all the

cultivars (Sairam and Saxena 2000). Gharti- Chhetri and Lales (1990) showed that in wheat

cultivars leaf proline increased as drought progressed. The increase in polyphenols under

stress may be due to triggered metabolism of shikimic acid pathway (Madhukar and Reddy,

1991). Therefore, an attempt was made to study the effect of water stress on plant growth,

chlorophyll pigments, proline and phenolic contents in wheat.


A pot experiment was carried out in the Department of Botany and Research Centre,

New Arts, Commerce and Science College, Ahmednagar (Maharashtra) to study the effect of

water stress on wheat. The seeds of Triticum aestivum L. var. 496 used as an experimental

plant. Healthy seeds of wheat were taken, surface sterilized with 0.1% Hgcl2, washed with

distilled water for 3-4 times and seeds were soaked in the distilled water for 4 hours. Fifteen

seeds were sown in each pot.

The pot culture experiment was laid out in a randomized block design with three

replications and five treatments of moisture regimes e.g. 100% FC, 80% FC, 60% FC, 40%

FC, and 20% FC. For making different moisture regimes gravimetric method described by

Narkhede (1989) was followed with some modifications. For which garden soil was used

after determining its water holding capacity. Plastic buckets each of 30x30x27 cm size were

filled with garden soil. The weight of each bucket was recorded every day in the morning and

the loss of water (moisture) under different moisture regimes was replenished by adding an

equal quantity of water. The growth parameters were recorded at seedling and anthesis stage.

Chlorophyll pigments were extracted and estimated by Arnon‟s (1949) method. Proline was

estimated by using Bates et al. (1973) method. Total contents of phenols were estimated by

method of Farkas and Kiraly, (1962).


The effect of different levels of FC% (moisture stress) on root and shoot length was

tabulated in Table 1 clearly showed that root and shoot length was decreased with decreasing

FC% from 80 to 20. The maximum decrease in root length was noted (1.2 and 2.5 cm)

respectively in seedling and anthesis stage at 20% FC. At higher water stress level the

cultivar showed maximum reduction in shoot length. The results recorded in Table 1

indicated very clearly that plant height and stem girth goes on decreasing with increase in




stress level. The maximum reduction in plant height and stem girth was noted at 20% FC at

seedling and anthesis stage.

The effect of different levels of moisture stress on number of leaves and leaf area at

seedling and anthesis stage was tabulated in Table 1. The results clearly showed that with

increase in water stress,number of leaves per plant were decreased. The maximum reduction

in leaf number was recorded at 20% FC. The maximum decrease in LA per plant Table 1 at

seedling and anthesis stage was recorded. Under water stress conditions the total chlorophyll

content of leaves decreased (Table 2). The lowest (0.76 mg/g fw) chlorophyll content was

observed in 20% FC at seedling stage. Similar results of decreased chlorophyll content under

moisture stress were also reported by Reddy et al. (2007) in rice genotype.

The water stress enhanced proline content in leaves. The highest proline content was

observed in the cultivar under 20% FC (Table 2) at seedling and anthesis stage. Similar trend

about the accumulation of proline during PEG induced water stress in different cultivars of

rice was reported by Das and Kalita (2010). The effects of different levels of FC at seedling

and anthesis stage on polyphenol content of wheat were tabulated in Table 2. The maximum

increase in phenols was noted at 20% FC both at seedling and anthesis stage. Madhukar and

Reddy (1991) attributed the increase in phenolic content under water stress to the triggered

metabolism of shikimic acid pathway for phenol synthesis.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

The author is thankful to Dr. R. K. Aher, Principal, New Arts, Commerce and Science

College, Parner for continuous encouragement and support.

REFERENCES

1. Ahmad, M., Mohammed, F., Maqbool, K., Azamand, A. and Iqbal, S. (2003). Genetic

variability and traits correlation in wheat. Sarhad J. Agril. 19(3):347-351.

2. Araus, J. L., Slafer, G. A., Reynolds, M. P. and Royo, C. (2002). Plant breeding and water

relation in C3 cereals: What to breed for? Annals of Botany (London), 89: 925-940.

3. Arnon, D. I. (1949). Copper enzymes in isolated chloroplasts polyphenol oxidase in Beta

vulgaris. Plant Physiol. 24:1-15.

4. Bartel, D. and Souer, E. (2004). Molecular responses of higher plants to dehydration. In:

Plant Responses to Abiotic Stress (eds.Hirt H and Shinozaki K), pp. 9-38. Springer-

Verlag, Berlin and Heidelberg, Germany.




5. Bates, L. S., R. P. Waldren, and I. D. Teare. (1973). Rapid determination of free proline

for water stress study. Pl. Physiol. 39:205-207.

6. Das, R. and Kalita, P. (2010). Characterization of some upland rice cultivars under

moisture stress condition. Indian J. Plant Physiol. 15:54-60.

7. Farkas, G. L. and Z. Kiraly. (1962). Role of phenolic compounds in the physiology of

plant disease and disease resistance. Phytopathol. 44:105-150.

8. Gharti- Chhetri G. B. and J. S. Lales. (1990). Biochemical and physiological responses of

nine spring wheat (Triticum aestivum) cultivars to drought stress at reproductive stage in

the tropics. Bel. J. Bot. 123(1-2): 27-35.

9. Madhukar, J. and S. M. Reddy. (1991). Biochemical changes in guava fruits due to the

infection by two pathogenic fungi. Indian J. Mycol. Plant Pathol. 21:179-182.

10. Narkhede, P. L. (1989). Effect of water stress on dry matter production, nutrient uptake,

and protein and carbohydrate metabolitesof rabi sorghum and soil factors controlling

conservation of moisture. Ph.D. Thesis, M.P.K.V.Rahuri.

11. Reddy, A. M. Shankhdhar D. and Shankhdhar, S. C. (2007). Physiological

characterization of rice genotypes under periodic water stress. Indian J. Plant Physiol.

12:189-193.

12. Sairam, R.K. and D. C. Saxena. (2000). Oxidative stress and antioxidants in wheat

genotypes: possible mechanism of water stress tolerance. J. Agro. Crop. Sci. 184: 55-61.

13. Shah, R. A., A. Ghule and M. I. Khan. (2004). Morphophysiological and biochemical

traits and their association with sink potential of chickpea (Cicer arietinum L.) in two

different moisture regimes. National Seminar on Plant Physiol. Pune, India. pp. 193-197.

14. Shangguan, Z. P. and B. Y. Chen. (1991). Growth and physiological responses to soil

drought in wheat. Shaanxi J. Agri. Sci. 1: 8-9.

15. Zwart, S. J. and Bastiaanssen, W. G. M. (2004). Review of measured crop water

productivity values for irrigated wheat, rice, cotton and maize. Agricultural Water

Management. 69:115-133.




COMMUNICATION AND IT SERVICES

DR. LANGADE SUNIL SAMBHAJI

Department of Commerce,

PDEA's Annasaheb Waghire College of Arts, Science & Commerce, Otur,

Tal- Junnar, Dist-Pune.

Email:- [email protected]

Abstract : The Information technology industry has played a significant role in transforming

India‟s image from a slow moving bureaucratic economy to a land of innovative

entrepreneurs and a leading global player in providing world class information technology

solutions and business services. The sector has increased its contribution to India's GDP

from 1.2% in FY1998 to 7.5% in FY2012. As per 2012 data, around 90 lacs people in India

were indirectly got employment through IT industry. Development in IT services also help

various other sectors like Communication, Banking, Healthcare and capital market.

Key Words: Communication, IT Services, Banking, Healthcare and Capital Market

INTRODUCTION

Information technology (IT) industry in India has played a key role in putting India

on the global map. IT industry in India has been one of the most significant growth

contributors for the Indian economy. The industry has played a significant role in

transforming India‟s image from a slow moving bureaucratic economy to a land of innovative

entrepreneurs and a global player in providing world class technology solutions and business

services. The industry has helped India transform from a rural and agriculture-based economy

to a knowledge based economy.Information Technology has made possible information

access at gigabit speeds. It has made tremendous impact on the lives of crore of people who

are poor, marginalized and living in rural and far flung topographies. Internet has made

revolutionary changes with possibilities of e-government measures like e-health, e-education,

e-agriculture, etc. Today, we use IT services in our day to day life, whether its filing Income

Tax returns or applying for passports online or railway e-ticketing or booking cinema ticket,

it just need few clicks of the mouse. India‟s IT potential is on a steady march towards global

competitiveness, improving defence capabilities and meeting up energy and environmental

challenges amongst others.





GOVERNMENT ACTION PLAN & SUPPORT MECHANISM

The Government had taken many qualitative and innovative decisions to support

service sector in Indian economy. Service sector includes many types of services like IT

services, hospitality services, health care services, banking services, port services etc. After

the economic reforms of 1991-92, major fiscal incentives provided by the Government of

India and the State Governments, like, liberalization of external trade, elimination of duties

on imports of information technology products, relaxation of controls on both inward and

outward investments and foreign exchange, setting up of Export Oriented Units (EOU),

Software Technology Parks (STP), and Special Economic Zones (SEZ), has enabled India to

flourish and acquire a dominant position in world‟s IT scenario.

Government of India has made drastic changes in its taxation laws to push IT &

export oriented services so that India can earn huge foreign exchange which can help in

stabilizing the economy and to maintain current account deficit under control. The

Government of India is also actively providing fiscal incentives and liberalizing norms for

FDI and raising capital abroad. In order to alleviate and to promote Indian IT industry, the

Government of India had set up a National Task Force on IT and Software Development to

examine the feasibility of strengthening the industry. Venture capital has been the main

source of finance for software industry around the world. In line with the international

practices, norms for the operations of venture capital funds have also been liberalized to

boost the industry.

The world has been recovering through a heart threatening recession which was

started in America in 2008-09. That period of last 4-5 years was a real tough challenge for

Indian IT industry because about 70% of total revenue was coming from these advanced

countries. While the underlying theme of 2010 was that of steady recovery from recession,

thanks to the accelerated recovery in emerging markets, worldwide spending in IT products

and services increased significantly in 2011. In 2011, India‟s growth has reflected new

demand for IT goods and services, with a major surge in the use of private and public cloud

and mobile computing on a variety of devices and through a range of new software

applications.

Continuous inflow of foreign direct investment in the IT sector and other related

service sectors is expected to continue in coming years. The inflow of huge volumes of FDI

in the IT industry of India has not only boosted the industry but the entire Indian economy in

recent years. It not only helps in changing investment sentiments at local level but also give a

boost to people working in IT sector. Foreign direct investment (FDI) inflow rose by more




than 100 per cent to US$ 4.66 billion in May 2011, up from US$ 2.21 billion a year ago,

according to the latest data released by the Department of Industrial Policy and Promotion

(DIPP). That is the highest monthly inflow in 39 months.

Foreign technology induction is also encouraged both through FDI and through

foreign technology collaboration agreements. India welcomes investors in Information

Technology sector. Greater transparency in policies and procedures has made India an

investor friendly platform. A foreign company can hold equity in Indian IT company‟s up to

100%.

DEVELOPMENT OF IT SERVICE INDUSTRY

India's IT Services industry was born in Mumbai in 1967 with the establishment of

Tata Group in partnership with Burroughs. The first software export zone SEEPZ was set up

in Mumbai way back in 1973, this was the old avatar of the modern day IT park. More than

80 percent of the country's software exports happened out of SEEPZ, Mumbai in 1980s.

The Information technology industry in India has gained a brand identity as a

knowledge economy due to Information technology IT and ITES sector. The IT industry has

two major components: IT Services and Business Process Outsourcing (BPO). The growth in

the service sector in India has been led by the IT sector, contributing substantially to increase

in GDP, employment, and exports.

The sector has increased its contribution to India's GDP from 1.2% in FY1998 to

7.5% in FY2012. According to NASSCOM, the IT–BPO sector in India aggregated revenues

of US$100 billion (around Rs. 6 lac Crore) in FY2012, where export and domestic revenue

stood at US$69.1 billion and US$31.7 billion respectively, growing by over 9%. The major

cities that account for about nearly 90% of this sectors exports are Bangalore, Chennai,

Hyderabad, Delhi, Mumbai and Kolkata. Bangalore is considered to be the Silicon Valley of

India because it is the leading IT exporter. Export dominate the IT industry, and constitute

about 77% of the total industry revenue. Though the IT sector is export driven, the domestic

market is also significant with a robust revenue growth. The industry‟s share of total Indian

exports (merchandise plus services) increased from less than 4% in FY1998 to about 25% in

FY2012.

Government has taken various initiatives to promote the growth of the IT industry and

has been a key catalyst for increased IT adoption--through sectors reforms that encourage IT

acceptance, National e-Governance Plan (NeGP), and the Unique Identification Development

Authority of India (UIDAI) programme that creates large-scale IT infrastructure and




promotes corporate participation. The Draft National Policy on Information Technology

2011 focuses on deployment of information communication technology (ICT) in all

sectors of the economy and providing IT solutions to the world. The Policy emphasizes

adoption of technology-enabled approaches to overcome developmental challenges in

education, health, skill development, financial inclusion, employment generation, and

governance so as to enhance efficiency across the board in the economy. It seeks to bring ICT

within the reach of the whole of India while at the same time harnessing the immense human

resource potential to support Research & development in the country and promoting Start ups

focussed on technology and innovation, a weighted deduction of 150% of expenditure

incurred on in-house R&D is introduced under the Income Tax Act. In addition to the

existing scheme for funding various R&D projects have been funded through new scheme

like Support International Patent Protection in Electronics & IT (SIP-EIT), Multiplier Grants

Scheme (MGS).

ROLE OF IT INDUSTRY IN EMPLOYMENT GENERATION

This sector has also led to massive employment generation. The industry continues

to be a net employment generator - and added 230,000 jobs in FY2012, thus providing

direct employment to about 28 lac employees, and indirectly employing 89 lac people.

However, the sector continues to face challenges of competitiveness in the globalized and

modern world, particularly from countries like China and Philippines. India's growing stature

in the Information Age enabled it to form close ties with both the United States of America

and the European Union. However, the recent global financial crises have deeply impacted

the Indian IT companies as well as global companies. As a result hiring has dropped sharply,

and employees are looking at different sectors like the financial service, telecommunications,

and manufacturing industries, which have been growing phenomenally over the last few

years.

IT sector is continuously generating new employment opportunities in all sectors

either directly or indirectly. It has covered a vast ground in all manufacturing as well as

service industry.




According to collected data over few years, the "Top Five Indian IT Services

Providers" are -

Tata Consultancy Services (TCS), Infosys, Cognizant, Wipro and HCL Technologies.

Company Name Revenue

No of

Employees in

India ( In

2012)

Head quarter Group /

Promoter

Tata Consultancy

Services US$ 10.17 Billion 2,54,076 Mumbai Tata Sons

Infosys US$6.69 Billion 1,53,761 Bangalore Shri. Narayan

Murthy

Cognizant US$ 7.05 Billion 1,85,045 Teaneck, New

Jersey

Wipro US$5.73billion 140,569 Bangalore Shri. Ajiz

Premji

HCL

Technologies $4.6 billion 85,355 Noida

Vama Sundari

Investments

(Delhi) Pvt Ltd

Due to development of IT sector, banking industry has gained exceptional advantage

with the use of „Centralised Processing Services‟. It directly impacted on mobilization of

money in the economy. We are comfortably using many new systems and innovative

mechanisms like Net banking, Mobile banking, ATM Services, RTGS/NEFT, online bill

payment, online insurance etc. This has saved large number of work hours and also helped in

growth of banking sector. This all is basically due to improved information technology

services and higher internet availability.

The other sector which has gained tremendous advantage of development of IT

services is Communication sector. Communication services include Mobile services, Voice

mail, Video Conferencing & teleconferencing. With the invention of 3G and 4G, speed of

internet has increased beyond our normal thinking limits. Increase in internet speed means

increase in speed of communication and money transactions. Speed of data recovery and

transfer of data is so important in modern world of globalization.

CHALLENGES

Cyber security and quality management are few key areas of concern in today‟s

information age. To overcome such concerns in today‟s global IT scenario, an increasing

number of IT-BPO companies in India have gradually started to emphasize on quality to

adopt global standards such as ISO 9001 (for Quality Management) and ISO 27000 (for




Information Security). Today, centers based in India account for the largest number of quality

certifications achieved by any single country.

Indian policy makers aim to transform India into a truly developed and empowered

society by 2020. However, to achieve this growth, the sector has to continue to re-invent

itself and strive for that extra mile, through new business models, global delivery,

partnerships and transformation. A collaborative effort from all stakeholders will be needed

to ensure future growth of India‟s IT sector. We will need to rise up to the new challenges

and put in dedicated efforts toward providing more and more of end-to-end solutions to the

clients to keep the momentum going.

India is now one of the biggest IT capitals in the modern world and has presence of all

the major players in the world IT sector. HCL, Wipro, Infosys and TCS are few of the

household names of IT companies in India.

FUTURE PROSPECTS

Globalization has had a profound impact in shaping the Indian Information

Technology industry. Over the years, verticals like manufacturing, telecom, insurance,

banking, finance and lately the retail, have been the growth drivers for this sector. But it is

very fast getting clear that the future growth of IT and IT enabled services will be fuelled by

the verticals of climate change, mobile applications, healthcare, energy efficiency and

sustainable energy.

The near future of Indian IT industry sees a significant rise in share of technology

spend as more and more service providers both Indian and global target new segments and

provide low cost, flexible solutions to customers.

By 2015, IT sector is expected to generate revenues of USD 130 billion (NASSCOM)

which will create a transformational impact on the overall economy. IT spending is expected

to significantly increase in verticals like automotive and healthcare while the government,

with its focus on e-governance, will continue to be a major spender.

CONCLUSION

Development and growth of Information technology and allied services have made a

massive change in living standard of our Indian society especially in urban & semi-urban

region. IT industry not only provides employment to local youth in India but also helped to

change view about India in eyes of foreign nations. It generates much needed foreign

exchange for our nation. The future of IT industry in India is very bright. Cities like Pune,




Hyderabad, Ahmadabad, and Nagpur are going on the footprint of Bangalore & Chennai.

This will create large number of employment opportunities in 2nd

line cities in India. IT story

of India is a real success story for the world and the concept of „Indian Multinational‟ has

come true only because of IT services or IT industry.

REFERENCES

1. Origin & growth of Software Industry in India – Rafiq Dossani, (Asia-Pacific Research

Center )

2. Information Technology In India – Wikipedia. ( www.wikipedia .com)

3. Industrial statistics in India sources, limitations and data gaps- India Development

Foundation

4. Planning Commission – Vision 2020 – Rohit Sarkar ( Special Consultant, Planning

Commission)

5. Website of FICCI – IT Sector in India – Facts & Views.




INTERTEXTUALITY : DEFINITIONS AND DIMENSIONS

DR. SATYAJIT T. PATIL


Pemraj Sarda College, Ahmednagar.

Abstract

The present article attempts to define intertextuality, an emerging term in literature

and delineates its diverse dimensions. It has been derived from the Latin term „intertexto‟,

which means „to intermingle while weaving‟. Intertextuality has become an influential

concept in modern literary theory. It is indeed one of the most leading intellectual terms

that dominate contemporary critical theory. Coined and conceptualized by the French

neo-structuralist Julia Kristeva in the late 1960s, it has remained a much debated term in

literary and cultural studies because of its diverse interpretations. At present,

intertextuality “has come to have almost as many meanings as users, from those faithful to

Kristeva‟s original version to those who simply use it as a stylish way of talking about

allusion and influence” (Irwin 2004:228). It has been borrowed, transformed and utilized

by so many critics and theorists that it is “in danger of meaning nothing more than

whatever each particular critic wishes it to mean” (Allen 2000:2). Thus even today, it

lacks a universally accepted mainstream definition. However, it can be said that,

confounding the realist agenda that art imitates life, intertextuality suggests that art

imitates art. It reminds us that texts are instrumental not only in the construction of other

texts but in the construction of experiences.

Derived from the Latin term intertexto, which means „to intermingle while weaving‟,

intertextuality promises to be a potent and prominent concept in modern literary theory. It is

indeed one of the most influential intellectual terms that dominate contemporary critical

theory. Coined and conceptualized by the French neo-structuralist Julia Kristeva in the late

1960s, it has remained a much debated term in literary and cultural studies because of its

diverse interpretations. As Daniel Chandler points out,

Intertextuality does not seem to be simply a continuum on a single dimension and

there does not seem to be a consensus about what dimensions we should be looking for.

Intertextuality is not a feature of the text alone but of the „contract‟ which reading it forges

between its author(s) and reader(s). (Chandler 2002: 141)




At present, intertextuality “has come to have almost as many meanings as users, from

those faithful to Kristeva‟s original version to those who simply use it as a stylish way of

talking about allusion and influence” (Irwin 2004:228). It has been borrowed, transformed

and utilized by so many critics and theorists that it is “in danger of meaning nothing more

than whatever each particular critic wishes it to mean” (Allen 2000:2). Thus even today, it

lacks a universally accepted mainstream definition. Despite this, there are some commonly

shared assumptions and tenets which throw light on this critical concept.

A fairly convincing and comprehensive definition of intertextuality appears in the

second edition of the Oxford English Dictionary (1997), which describes it as “The need of

one text to be read in the light of its allusions to and differences from the content or structure

of other texts; the (allusive) relationship between esp. literary texts”. Intertextuality thus

basically denotes an inborn interconnection between all texts. It specifically refers to the

ways in which one text leads to, evokes, is made from, and is intersected by others. It can be

defined as the structural presence within a work of elements of earlier works. The notion of

intertextuality involves a trace of the ceaseless movement of various texts form spaces

outside the body, to the „virtual‟ library inside everyone‟s mind. Thomas Greene rightly

observes, “…since a literary text that draws nothing from its predecessors is inconceivable,

intertextuality is a universal constant” (Greene 1988:10). Thus intertextuality implies the

shaping of a text‟s meaning by other texts. It is, in fact, a name given to the manner in which

texts of all sorts (oral, visual, literary, virtual) contain references to other texts that have, in

some ways, contributed to their production and signification. The intertextual theory,

therefore, challenges the age-old assumption that every text is unique in itself and contains a

stable, independent meaning. On the other hand, it presupposes the principle that every text is

an intertext, because it is directly or indirectly related to a number of other texts.

The concept of intertextuality thus dramatically blurs the outlines of the book,

dismantling its image of totality and self-sufficiency, and projecting it as an unbounded tissue

of quotations and connections, paraphrases and pieces, texts and contexts. Michael Foucault

makes a pedagogic proclamation:

The frontiers of a book are never clear-cut: beyond the title, the first lines and the last

full stop, beyond its internal configuration and its autonomous form, it is caught up in a

system of references to other books, other texts, other sentences: it is a node within a

network… The book is not simply the object that one holds in hands… Its unity is variable

and relative. (Foucault 1974: 23)




Intertextuality underlines the hitherto overlooked fact that every text is framed by

others in many ways. Most obvious and conspicuous are the formal or structural frames. One

understands any text consciously or unconsciously in relation to such framings. In other

words, texts provide contexts within which other texts may be created or interpreted. These

contexts are not only textual but also social. To interpret any text is, therefore, to trace its

connection with those texts which are responsible for its being. “Among intertexuality‟s most

practical functions is (re)evaluation by means of comparison, counter-position and contrast”

(Orr 2003:7).

Broadly speaking, intertexual relationship marks its presence in three modes:

1. Texts of quotation which quote or allude to other literary or non-literary works;

2. Texts of imitation which seek to parody, pastiche, paraphrase, „translate‟ or supplant the

original;

3. Genre texts where identifiable shared clusters of codes and literary conventions are

grouped together in recognizable patterns.

Jonathan Culler attempts a meticulous appraisal of this term:

Intertextuality has a double focus. On the one hand, it calls our attention to the

importance of prior texts, insisting that the autonomy of texts is a misleading notion and that

a work has the meaning it does only because certain things have previously been written. Yet

so far as it focuses on intelligibility, on meaning, „intertextuality‟ leads us to consider prior

texts as contributions to a code which makes possible the various effects of signification.

Intertextuality thus becomes less a name for a work‟s relation to particular prior texts than a

designation of its participation in the discursive space of culture: the relationship between a

text and the various languages or signifying practices of a culture and its relation to those

texts which articulate for it the possibilities of that culture… The study of intertextuality is

thus not the investigation of sources and influences as traditionally conceived; it casts its net

wider to include anonymous discursive practices, codes whose origins are lost, that makes

possible the signifying practices of later texts… Intertextuality is the general discursive space

that makes a text intelligible. (Culler 2001:114)

Zuzana Mitosinkova, in her critical article, “Tracing Intertextuality”, alludes to the

omnipresence of intertextuality and infers the root cause of the lack of uniformity and

consensus in its application in the following way:

Mutual relationships between texts, mainly labelled by the term intertextuality seem

to be motive factor of contemporary literary criticism. However, the province of this

phenomenon is not restricted only to literature, intertextuality has long time ago gone beyond




its competence and it has equally important function also in film, where its concept is

elaborated as a set of mutually intertwined cinematographic codes. Following a similar

principle it also works in music, fine art or theatre...actually it permeates all media and has

become inseparable part of (post)modern artistic practice… Its origin goes back deep into

history, reference to it can be found in the Book of the books (anyway, intertextuality is a

common part of biblical studies), quite so that the whole generation of literary critics, without

realizing that, contributed by their critical works to the development of the phenomenon of

intertextuality… Probably because we encounter intertextuality nearly everywhere, it really

has a wide-ranging scope of competence and the way individual theoreticians elucidate its

essence differs a lot. (Mitosinkova 2011: 64)

The theory of intertextuality is believed to have its origin in Saussurean linguistics,

semiotics and post-structuralism. However, Matthew Arnold‟s contention in his Inaugural

lecture at Oxford in 1857 can be regarded as the foremost critical recognition of the

pervasiveness of intertextuality: “Everywhere there is connection, everywhere there is

illustration. No single event, no single literature is adequately comprehended except in

relation to other literatures” (Basnett 1993:1). Thus Arnold may be regarded as the first critic

to concede that texts are part of a great intertextual tapestry. In his scholarly article, published

recently, Adolphe Hebert convincingly proves that “though the word for it had not yet been

coined, the workings of intertextuality were already being explored by such modernists as

T.S. Eliot and David Jones” (Herbert 2007:54). He holds that, Eliot, not only as a poet but

also as a theoretician, can be said to have been the great forerunner of intertextuality with his

“quasi-intertextual ideas” presented in “Tradition and the Individual Talent”, published in

1919. According to him:

A major rupture took place then- experienced as a social, political, philosophical and

moral crisis- creating the sort of critical self-consciousness that led to the challenge of all the

commonly accepted views on language, literature and the arts. It helped produce the aesthetic

and literary movement later came to be known as modernism- a movement in which, though

the word had not yet been invented nor the concept defined, intertextuality was at work

(Ibid:55).

To prove his contention, Herbert quotes the famous statement by Eliot from this path-

breaking essay, “No poet, no artist of any art, has his complete meaning alone” (Eliot 1951:

15). Eliot‟s argument is grounded on the belief that all true poets and artists have a historical

sense that makes them aware of the “simultaneous order” of tradition. This historical sense

“involves a perception, not only of the pastness of the past, but of its presence” (Ibid). It thus




makes a writer truly „traditional‟. The concept of tradition is further developed by Eliot as

follows:

What happens when a new work of art is created is something that happens

simultaneously to all works of art which preceded it. The existing monuments form an ideal

order among themselves, which is modified by the introduction of the new (the really new)

work of art among them (Ibid).

In this way, the order of tradition is constantly altered and updated. The process of

depersonalization Eliot proposes and advocates is found to be echoed in Barthes‟ concept of

the death of the Author. Eliot speaks of the “continual surrender” of the self and adds that

“The progress of an artist is a continual self-sacrifice, a continual extinction of personality”

(Eliot 1951: 17). Eliot uses the analogy of the role of catalyst in a chemical reaction in order

to explain the function of a poet‟s mind. He states, “The poet‟s mind is in fact a receptacle for

seizing and storing up numberless feelings, phrases, images, which remain there until all the

particles which can unite to form a new compound are present together” (Eliot 1951: 19).

Herbert argues that this last formulation suggested by Eliot is overtly compatible with the

idea of a text being the redistribution of the intertext. He thus arrives at the conclusion that

the theory of intertextuality is to be found in its embryonic form, or read between the lines, in

Eliot‟s present essay. The research accepts this proposition, yet wishes to add that Eliot does

not exemplify his ideas, and therefore, his contentions, though valuable, out of the premise of

intertextuality.

In accordance with the schools it owes to, intertextuality attempts to disrupt the

notions of stable meaning, objective interpretation and the originality of the authorial

consciousness. It is strongly grounded in the post-structuralist claim that linguistic codes and

structures pre-exist the individual speaker. In other words, language as a system is already in

place before the subject/speaker makes a communicative act. Thus the subject is always

positioned within the interpretative systems and can only employ those systems to describe

the experience of reality. Claude Levi-Strauss states the same in the following remark: “I

don‟t have the feeling that I write my books, I have the feeling that my books get written

through me…I never had, and still do not have, the perception of feeling my personal

identity. I appear to myself as the place where something is going on, but there is no I, no

me” (cited in Chandler 202: 142). As a result, whatever one speaks or writes is just another

version of what has been previously spoken or written. Due to this, every text becomes a

collage of other textual influences and the writer becomes an orchestrator rather than

originator. As such, a work ceases to be creation but becomes compilation. Moreover, the




role of the reader gets prominence because the „meaning‟ that is derived from the text

depends upon the reader‟s prior acquaintance with the intertexts that are invoked. In this way,

intertextuality is:

All literary works…are “rewritten”, if only unconsciously, by the societies which read

them. None today- even for the first time- can read a famous novel or poem, look at a famous

painting, drawing or sculpture, listen to a famous piece of music or watch a famous play or

film without being conscious of the contexts in which the text had been reproduced, drawn

upon, alluded to, parodied and so on. Such contexts constitute a primary frame which the

reader cannot avoid drawing upon in interpreting the text (Eagleton 1983: 12).

Thus considered, intertextuality becomes “a very general phenomenon to be found in

literature of all ages, and most of the forms of intertextuality- which include imitation,

parody, travesty, translation, adaptation, quotation and allusion- have existed ever since

antiquity” (Broich 1997: 127). It denotes a work of literature in which allusions to other

works are subtly masked by the author and formulates an idea that Text is a transhistorical,

synchronic entity; a weave of ways to write, that stretches across multiple works in a

linguistic mode, consisting of different voices and perspectives. In other words,

intertextuality designates a set of codes of utterances that explain how texts shape one

another.

The core principles and specific parameters of intertextuality emerge from the French

intellectual scene of the late 1960s, which marks a transition from structuralism to post-

structuralism. The „canon‟ of French theorists of intertextuality includes the inventor of the

term Julia Kristeva, Roland Barthes, Gerard Genette, Michael Riffaterre and others. Of

course, the contribution of the theorists outside France cannot be overlooked. The work of the

Russian theorist Mikhail Bakhtin deserves special attention because, as Graham Allen rightly

points out, “Julia Kristeva‟s attempt to combine Saussurean and Bakhtinian theories of

language and literature produced the first articulation of intertextual theory” (Allen 2000:3).

Among others, the North American critic Harold Bloom is the most conspicuously dedicated

theorist to a version of intertextual theory and practice.

To conclude, it can be said that, confounding the realist agenda that art imitates life,

intertextuality suggests that art imitates art. It reminds us that texts are instrumental not only

in the construction of other texts but in the construction of experiences. In fact, much of what

we 'know' about the world is derived from what we have read in books, newspapers and

magazines, from what we have seen in the cinema and on television and from what we have

heard on the radio. Life is thus lived through texts and framed by texts to a greater extent than




we are normally aware of. Thus, as Daniel Chandler observes, “Intertextuality blurs the

boundaries not only between texts but between texts and the world of lived experience”

(Chandler 2002:149).

REFERENCES

1. Allen, Graham. Intertextuality .Oxon: Routledge, 2000. Print.

2. Broich, Ulrich. “Intertextuality” in International Postmodernism: theory and practice

(eds) Hans Bertans and Doywe Fokkema. Philadelphia: John Benjamin Publishing

Company, 1997. Print.

3. Chandler, Daniel. Semiotics: The Basics. London: Routledge, 2002. Print.

4. Culler, Jonathan. The Pursuit of Signs. London: Routedge, 2001. Print.

5. Eagleton, Terry. Literary Theory: An Introduction. Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1983. Print.

6. Eliot, T S. “Tradition and the Individual Talent” in Selected Essays. London: Faber, 1951.

Print.

7. Foucault, Michel. The Archeology of Knowledge. London: Tavistock, 1974. Print.

8. Green, Thomas. as cited in “Intertextuality and the Rhetoric Canon”. Schoeck, R. J.

Criticism, History and Intertextuality (eds) Richard Fleming and Michael Payne. London:

Bucknell University Press, 1988. Print.

9. Haberer, Adolphe. “Intertextuality in Theory and Practice” in Literature 49 (5) pp 54-67,

3 April 2007.28 June 2010.Web.

10. Irwin, William. “Against Intertextuality” in Philosophy and Literature, Vol 28, Oct, 2004.

pp. 227-242. Print.

11. Orr, Mary. Intertextuality: debates and contexts. Cambridge: Policy Press, 2003. Print.

12. Plottel, Jeanine Parisier and Hanna Charney (eds). Intertextuality: new perspectieves in

criticism. New York: New York Literary Forum, 1978. Print.

13. Rodowick, David. “The Crisis of Political Modernism: Criticism and Ideology” in

Contemporary Film Theory. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 1994. Print.

14. Zuzana Mitošinková, “Tracing Intertextuality”. 26 November 2011. 30 April 2012. Web.




TOXICITY STUDY OF JUICE OF ADATHODA VASICA FRESH LEAVES

SHIRISH S. PINGALE

P. G. Department of Chemistry,

Arts, Com. & Sci. College, Narayangaon, Pune.


Abstract : The aim of the present research work is to carry out acute toxicity study for juice

of Adathoda vasica fresh leaves in water. The exposure of the fresh juice of leaves of

Adathoda vasica on Swiss mice was carried out and the exposure route was oral single

administration with water as a vehicle. The observations of changes in body weight, food and

water intake as well as cage side observations were reported. All the observations indicate

that Adathoda vasica fresh leaves are found to be nontoxic.

Keywords: Adathoda vasica, acute toxicity, fresh leaves.

INTRODUCTION

The use of natural medicines is increasing and is a persistent aspect of present day

health care. There is a belief of many consumers that naturalness is a guarantee of

harmlessness, but this is not true. Some traditionally used medicines can produce dangerous

and sometimes even lethal poisoning. The world health organization is fully aware of the

importance of herbal medicines to the health of many people throughout the world. Thus,

herbal medicines have been recognized as a valuable and readily available resource of

primary health care and WHO have endorsed their safe and effective use. A few herbal

medicines have withstood scientific testing but others are simply used for traditional reasons

to protect, restore and improve health. The WHO has set guidelines for toxicity studies of

herbal medicines. It supports appropriate usage of herbal medicines and encourages the

remedies, which are proved to be safe and effective. The route for administration for sub-

acute, sub-chronic and chronic toxicity can be any one of the above stated routes, but most

often it is by oral route [1, 2, 3].

Toxic Dose

Poison is any agent capable of producing a deleterious response in a biological

system, seriously injuring function or producing death. Among chemicals there is a wide

spectrum of doses needed to produce deleterious effects, serious injury or death. Some

chemicals, which produce death in microgram doses, are extremely poisonous, while others




may be relatively harmless after doses in excess of several grams. A chemical agent does not

produce toxic effects in biological system unless that agent or its metabolic breakdown

(biotransformation) products reach appropriate sites in the body at a concentration and for a

length of time, sufficient to produce a toxic manifestation. The major factors which influence

toxicity are the route of administration, the duration and the frequency of exposure to the

chemical agent. Toxicologists usually divide the exposure of animals into Acute toxicity,

Subacute toxicity, Sub-chronic toxicity, Chronic toxicity [4].

Limit Test

All chemicals can produce toxicity under some experimental conditions, for instance,

if a sufficiently large dose is administered. It is therefore, misleading to conduct acute

toxicity studies at unreasonably high dose levels for the sake of demonstrating lethality and /

or toxicity, which may be irrelevant to the use of compound itself. An extremely high dose of

a practically nontoxic compound for example, can cause gastrointestinal blockage, which in

turn can result in gastrointestinal tract dysfunction. Toxicity in such a case is not related to

the intrinsic characteristic of the test substance, since effect manifested is a direct result of the

physical blockage caused by the biologically inert substance. There must be a point,

however, at which an investigator may conclude that a test substance is practically nontoxic

or nonlethal after an acute exposure. This test limit for oral toxicity generally is considered to

be 5ml/Kg body weight. If no mortality is observed at this dose level, a higher dose level

generally is not necessary [5]. The safety of all medicinal products is of the utmost

importance. All applications for new medicines undergo extensive evaluation of their risk to-

benefit ratio and, once granted, products are closely monitored for the occurrence of adverse

effects. The safety of herbal remedies is of particular importance as most of these products

are self-prescribed, available as OTC (over the counter) products and are used to treat minor

and often chronic conditions. The trend in the usage of plants as medicines traditionally has

enabled one to record the acute and obvious signs of toxicity of the plants, which can be well

recognized, and hence their use is avoided.


Acute Toxicity Study juice of Adathoda vasica fresh leaves

An acute toxicity study was carried out by using mice as the experimental model. The

fully grown yellow fresh leaves of Adathoda vasica were collected from Awsari Forest Park,

Ambegaon, Pune. These fresh leaves were crushed in electric mixer and the fresh juice was

collected in beaker. This fresh juice was used for toxicity study. The aim of this study was to




assess the acute toxicity of juice of Adathoda vasica fresh leaves on oral administration.

Study protocol is given below in table 1.

Table 1: Study Protocol

Name of the study Acute toxicity study

Test material juice of Adathoda vasica fresh leaves

Animal model Albino Swiss Mice

Animals procured from Raj Biotech (INDIA) Ltd., Pune

Sex Male and Female

Weight range of animals Between 35 to 55 g

No. of dose groups Three groups

Animals per group 2 males and 2 females

Route of administration Intragastric administration with the help

of gavage No. 16

Dose volume 2.0 ml per animal

Vehicle for administration Distilled water

No. of administrations Single

Concentration of dose 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0 and 10ml/Kg body

weight

Study duration Acclimatization for 14 days, one day drug

administration and 14 days observation

period including holidays

Parameters observed Cage side observations, daily food and

water intake, daily body weight and daily

mortality record etc.

Animal Maintenance

The animals were housed in polyurethane cages. The cages were provided with rice

husk bedding and were cleaned daily. The animals were provided with drinking water ad

libitum and were fed on commercially available Mice feed supplied by Amrut Feed. The feed

was enriched with stabilized vitamins such as Vit. A and D3, Vit. B12, Thiamine, Riboflavin,

Folic acid and supplemented with all minerals and microelements. Measured quantities of

water and feed were supplied daily in each cage. The consumption of water and food was

estimated from the amount of water remaining in feeding bottles and from the amount of feed

remaining in the feed hopper.





Cage Side Observations

Assessment of the behavior of animals was carried out by general observations of

each animal on a daily basis from the stage of dosing to the end of the study. Cage-side

observations included daily recording of condition of the fur; damaged areas of skin;

subcutaneous swellings or lumps (the size, shape and consistency), areas of tenderness,

abdominal distension, eyes - for dullness, discharges, opacities, pupil diameter, ptosis

(drooping of upper eyelid), the color and consistency of the faeces, wetness or soiling of the

perimenum, condition of teeth, breathing abnormalities, gait, etc. Any changes or

abnormalities recorded could be an indication of toxicity. The test animals at all dose levels

showed no significant changes in behavior before and after the administration of an oral dose

of juice of Adathoda vasica fresh leaves as slurry following table 2 shows the dosage regime.

Table 3 shows the observations for the parameters studied. Table 4 shows the mortality

record.

Table 2: Doses Regime

Sr.

No.

Sex Dose ml/Kg

Body Wt.

No. of animals

used

Total Vol. administered in

cc

1 Male 2 2 2

2 Female 2 2 2

3 Male 4 2 2

4 Female 4 2 2

5 Male 6 2 2

6 Female 6 2 2

7 Male 8 2 2

8 Female 8 2 2

9 Male 10 2 2

10 Female 10 2 2

Table 3: Cage Side Observations for all animals

Sr.

No.

Parameters Cage Side

Observations

1 Condition of the fur Normal

2 Skin Normal

3 Subcutaneous swellings Nil




4 Abdominal distension Nil

5 Eyes -dullness Nil

6 Eyes - opacities Nil

7 Pupil diameter Normal

8 Ptosis Nil

9 Colour & consistency of the faeces Normal

10 Wetness or soiling of the perimenum Nil

11 Condition of teeth Normal

12 Breathing abnormalities Nil

13 Gait Normal

Table 4: Mortality Record

Group

ml/Kg 2 2 4 4 6 6 8 8 10 10

Sex Male Femal

e Male

Femal

e Male

Femal

e Male

Femal

e Male

Femal

e

Hr. 1 - - - - - - - - - -

Hr. 2 - - - - - - - - - -

Hr. 3 - - - - - - - - - -

Hr. 4 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 1 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 2 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 3 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 4 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 5 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 6 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 7 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 8 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 9 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 10 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 11 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 12 - - - - - - - - - -




Day 13 - - - - - - - - - -

Day 14 - - - - - - - - - -

Mortalit

y

0/2 0/2 0/2 0/2 0/2 0/2 0/2 0/2 0/2 0/2

Body Weight Changes

Body weight is an important factor to monitor the health of an animal. Loss in body

weight is frequently the first indicator of the onset of an adverse effect. A dose, which causes

10 % or more reduction in the body weight, is considered to be a toxic dose. It is considered

to be the dose, which produces minimum toxic effect, irrespective of whether or not it is

accompanied by any other changes. All the animals from treated groups did not show any

significant decrease in body weights for all the 14 days as compared with the zero day values,

indicating no signs of toxicity against juice of Adathoda vasica fresh leaves. The variation in

body weight changes of males and females.

Food and Water Consumption

There was no significant change in food and water intake of the test animals at all

dose levels.

Mortality

Mortality is the main criteria in assessing the acute toxicity (LD50) of any drug. There

was no mortality recorded even at the highest dose level i.e. 10 ml/Kg. body weight.

CONCLUSION

From the results of this study, it is observed that there is no considerable change in

body weight, food and water consumption by the animals from all dose groups (2.00 ml/Kg

body weight to 10.0 ml/Kg body weight), There was no mortality recorded even at the

highest dose level i.e. 10.0 ml/Kg body weight, which proves that the juice of Adathoda

vasica fresh leaves has no significant toxic effect in mice.

REFERENCES

1. Research guidelines for evaluating the safety and efficacy of herbal medicine, World

Health Organisation Regional Office for the Western Pacific Manila, (1993), 1-9.




2. John H. Duffus, Fundamental Toxicology for Chemists, Ed. John H. Duffus and Horward

G. J. Worth, Royal Society of Chemistry, (1996), 1-5.

3. Michael A. Gallo, Casarett and Doull‟s Toxicology - The Basic Science of Poison, Ed.

Curtis D. Klassen, International edition, McGrath-Hill Health Professions Division, 5th

edition, (1996), Ch. 1, 3 – 5.

4. Trevan J.W., The error of determination of toxicity, Proc. R. Soc. Lond., (1927),

Vol.101B, 483-514.

5. David L. Eaton and Curtis D. Klassen, Casarett and Doull‟s Toxicology. The Basic

Science of Poison, Ed. Curtis D. Klassen, International edition, McGrath-Hill Health

Professions Division, 5th

edition, (1996), Ch. 2, 13.

6. EPA: EPA fact sheet: Background on acute toxicity testing for chemical safety, August

(1984 ).

7. FDA: “Final report on acute studies workshop” Sponsored by the U.S. Food and Drug

Administration on November 9, 1983.

8. Kennedy G.L et al, “J. Appl. Toxicol.”, (1986), 24, 457- 463.

9. Pingale Shirish S. *, Raghunath D. Pokharkar and Mugdha S. Pingale,

Standardisation of Herbal Drug as a Potent Liver Tonic, Pharmacologyonline

Newsletter, 1:13-19 (2008).

10. Pingale Shirish S. *, Pokharkar Raghunath D. and Pingale Mugdha S., Acute toxicity

Study for Argemone mexicana L. Root Bark Powder, Pingale et al.,

Pharmacologyonline Newsletter, 1: 24-31 (2008).

11. Pingale Shirish S. * and Pokharkar Raghunath D., Acute toxicity study for Cissus

quadrangularis whole plant powder, Pharmacologyonline Newsletter, 2: 256-262

(2008)

12. Pingale Shirish S., Acute toxicity study for Centella asiatica whole plant powder,

Pharmacologyonline Newsletter, 3: 80-84 (2008)

13. Pingale S S, Acute Toxicity Study of Ocimum Sanctum, IRJP (1) Dec 2010, 409-413

14. Pingale Shirish Sadashiv1, Markandeya Anil Ganpat

2 and Gawali Sunita

3, Toxicity

Study for Celocia argentea Leaves IRJP, 2 (1), Jan 2011 263-266

15. Pingale Shirish S., Hepatoprotective Action of Terminalia belerica on CCl4 Induced

Hepatic Disorders, Scholars Research Library, Der Pharma Chemica, 2011, 3(1): 42-48,

16. Pingale Shirish S.

1 and Virkar

Popat S

2., Evaluation of Acute Toxicity For Abutilon

Indicum, Scholars Research Library, Der Pharmacia Lettre, 2011, 3(3):37-42.




17. Pingale Shirish S. and Shewale Shrikant S, Acute Toxicity Study of Phyllanthus

Amarus, International Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences Review and Research, Pg 81-

84, Volume 9, Issue 1, July – August 2011;

18. Pingale Shirish Sadashiv and Avvaru Radha Krishna, Acute Toxicity Study for

Achyranthes aspera Leaves, Journal of Pharmacy Research, Vol. 4. Issue 7. July 2011,

2221-2222.

19. Pingale Shirish Sadashiv, Acute Toxicity Study For Tinospora Cordifolia,

International Journal of Research in Ayurveda and Pharmacy, IJRAP 2011, 2(5), 1571-

1573,

20. Pingale Shirish Sadashiv, Acute Toxicity Study for Ricinus communis, Der Pharmacia

Lettre, 2011: 3 (5)132-137.

21. Pingale Shirish S. and More Bharat P., Toxicity Study of Terminalia chebula, Pg. No.

2127-2134, World Journal of Pharmaceutical Research, Vol 3, Issue 2, 2014.




PROGRESS OF CO-OPERATIVE SECTOR - A CASE STUDY OF MAHARASHTRA

STATE

DR. B. S. SALUNKHE


Dept. of Commerce, Shankarrao Mohite Mahavidyalaya,

Akluj, Dist : Solapur 413101 (M.S.)

Abstract : The co-operative movement in Maharashtra has played a significant role in the

social and economic development of the state. Here we see the co-operative movement of last

50 years. The co-operative movement in Maharashtra started after the passing of co-

operative societies Act 1904. Initially, this movement was confined mainly to the field of

agricultural credit. Later it is rapidly spread to other fields like agro processing agro

marketing, rural industries, consumers stores, social services etc. But the progress of co-

operative sector in Maharashtra is imbalanced.

Keywords : Progress, Co-operative Sector, Development, Imbalance.

INTRODUCTION

In India the state of Maharashtra is considered as importanant state. It has always

been in the forefront in respect of using various schemes of development. The state has made

remarkable progress in the field of co-operative sector as well as agricultural & industry over

the last 50 years.

Maharashtra is told as a land of co-operative because the co-operative movement has

played a great role in the development of the state as compared to other states. The main

reason of co-operative movement was the great leader of Maharashtra, late Vasantdada Patil,

Yashvantrao Chavan and Vasantrao Naik made great efforts for the spreading of co-operative

movement in Maharashtra. This has reasulated in a considerable beneficial impact in raising

the standards of the rural masses. So, for that purpose the paper determing the Progress of co-

operative movement in Maharashtra last 50 years.


1) To find out the progress of co-operative movement.

2) To find out the number of members of co-operative societies.

3) To find out the quantative progress of co-operative societies.




LIMITATIONS OF THE STUDY

1) The paper covers only the study of co-operative progress in Maharashtra.

2) The paper is depend upon only the collection of secondary data.

ANALYSIS OF CO-OPERATIVE PROGRESS

After passing the Maharashtra state co-operative Act 1960, all co-operative societies

are registered under Maharashtra co-operative societies Act.In the initial stage the agriculture

co-operative societies were established in every village panchayat area and then there

after various types of organizations was started in every field, such as consumers, salary

earners, small scale industries, fisheries etc. All the Progress of co-operative sector in

Maharashtra is given in different tables.

Table 4.1

Progress of co-operative movement in Maharashtra

(Members in Lakhs and Rs. in Crores)

Particulars 1961 1981 2001 2011

Total Societies 31565 60747 158016 224306

Total Members 42 148 430 530

Paid up share capital 53 600 7560 20546

of which Govt. 08 105 1150 1965

Owned funds 73 1207 17770 45934

Deposits 76 1939 74462 132490

Working capital 326 5210 134441 248434

Loans advanced (Net) 95 1116 43392 98403

Audit classification A 3110 3671 N.A. 6390

B 10921 11670 N.A. 15849

C 7515 18854 N.A. 13351

D 3088 3477 N.A. 2409

Not Classified 291 774 N.A. 340

Not Audited 6640 22301 N.A. 76105

Not due for Audit N.A. N.A. N.A. 805

Note: - N.A. = Not Available

(Source – Co-operative movement at a glance in Maharashtra 2011, page No.-5)




Table 4.1 shows that the progress of total co-operative societies. Growth rate of co-

operative credit societies was much more up to 2001 but is was clear indicate that after 2001

the progress rate of co-operative societies was not increased more because of globalization.

There was also a significant increase in total membership of the societies up to 2011,but in

2011 it is shows that the membership ratio will be decreased. It means the progress rate of co-

operative societies members is shown imbalanced so it was not good sign to co-operative

sector. The highest magnitude of increase in case of deposits at that time loan amount also

increased. Working capital of co-operative societies are also increased significantly. There

was also significant increase in loan amount during 1961 to 2011, however the condition of

economically backward people did not improve. Near about 30 percent of societies are not

audited in the year 2011. It will be also dangerous for the future of co-operative societies.

Table 4.2

Progress of Co-operative societies in Maharashtra

Sr.

No. Type 1961 1981 2001 2011

1 Agricultural Credit

Societies 21438 18605 20585 21485

2 Non-Agricultural

credit Societies 1631 5477 22014 23434

3 Marketing Societies 344 423 1115 1779

4 Productive Enterprises

(Sugar, Rice Mill etc.) 4306 14327 39070 48848

5

Social Service

(Consumers Societies,

Housing etc.)

3486 21915 75232 128660

Total 31565 60747 158016 224306

(Source: - Co-operative movement at a glance in Maharashtra 2011, Page No. 5)

Table 4.2 indicates that, the total number of co-operative societies are increased to

224306. It shows that co-operative societies number were increased near about 7 times from

the year 1961. It means the progress in societies quantitative numbers is satisfactory, but the

progress of numbers are not in imbalanced. In agricultural credit societies the number of

societies are near about same in 1961 and in the year 2011. It means the progress of societies

in Maharashtra are not equivalent.




Table 4.3

Progress in Number of members of co-operative societies in Maharashtra

(Members in Lakhs)

Sr.

No. Type 1961 1981 2001 2011

1 Agricultural credit

societies 22.55 64.47 114.96 152.48

2 Non Agricultural credit

societies 10.87 37.59 184.68 216.18

3 Marketing societies 1.41 4.71 8.4 13.37

4 Productive enterprises

(Sugar, Rice etc) 3.23 21.24 63.39 80.10

5 Social Service

(Consumer, Housing etc) 3.94 19.99 58.79 68.09

Total 42 148 430.22 530.22

(Source: - Co-operative movement at a glance in Maharashtra – 2011, page no. 5)

Table 4.3 shows that, the total members of co-operative societies are 530.22 lakhs. It

shows that the progress of co-operative societies members were increased more than 10 times

from the year 1961. It means the progress in members of societies are also remarkable, but

the progress in all types of societies are not balanced. Marketing and social service societies

shows the less progress as compare to agricultural and non agricultural societies in

Maharashtra.

CONCLUSION

The co-operative progress in Maharashtra is played very important role in the

development of state economically as well as socialy.Co-oprative sector have contributed to

the progress of state economy in various ways. Co-operative has embracing 100 percent of

villages and 75 percent of household in its fold in the state but the globalization of Indian

economy has bought out drastic structural changes in all spheres of the economy. The co-

operative sectors are also faced the new challenges such as shortage of raw material, lack of

research, inadequate capital, technical efficiency, old technology. So on so they can survive

only when they prove their efficiency and exhibit their mettle in terms of increased cost




efficiency, new technology. The employees who are working in co-operative sector should

manage them effectively, so that they can meet out there problems arising out of competition.

REFERENCES

1) Management of co-operative in India – Mariappan V.

2) The Maharashtra co-operative quarterly.

3) Co-operative movement at a glance in Maharashtra 2011.

4) Co-operation in India, by mamoria C.B. and Saksena R.D. Kitab Mahal, Allahabad -

1977

5) Hundred years of co-operative movement – Ashok Bandyopadhya.




MICROFINANCE : KEY TO SUSTAINABLE SOCIO-ECONOMIC EVELOPMENT

DR. BHOSALE J. P.

Head : Research Centre in Commerce.

Arts, Commerce & Science College, Narayangaon,

Tal :Junnar, Dist : Pune, Pin : 410504, Maharashtra, India.

Savitribai Phule Pune University, Pune.

E-mail :[email protected], [email protected]

Cell : 9860360733, 9970374747

ABSTRACT : Liberalization, Privatization, Globalisation Free Economy, Digital Economy

are the features of today‟s business world. Microfinance is now a buzzword in international

aid circles. It is mooted the panacea for sustainable development in very poor countries, and

has been successfully implemented. Poverty alleviation is one of the primary goals of

developing countries and international assistance agencies. The eradication of poverty and

the promotion of sustainable development represent two of the most important challenges

facing the world in the 21st century. Under sustainable development all human beings will

have the opportunity to satisfy their basic needs in an appropriate way, to enjoy equal access

to resources, to have a say in the social and economic development process as it affects them,

and to participate in political decision making. The present research paper focuses on micro

finance and how micro finance is key for sustainable socio-economic develoments.

KEYWORDS : Microfinance, Microcredit, Grameen Bank, Sustainable Development, Socio-

Economic Development etc.

INTRODUCTION

Micro finance means providing poor families with very small loans to help them

engage in productive activities or grow their tiny business. Now microfinance has come to

include a broader range of services such as microcredit, savings and micro-insurance etc. The

focus of microfinance has not been only on providing small credit, but to integrate it with

other developmental activities. Today, microfinance is very much in the agenda of public

policy and it has been increasingly used as a vehicle for reaching the otherwise unreachable

poor in the country.

Microfinance is not just a tool for poverty eradication but also for individual

development, growth in entrepreneurial activities in the economically backward areas. Over





the last few years the microfinance services have been changing people's lives and

revitalizing communities. The microfinance is a vehicle to reach SC/ST/OBC. The horizon is

seen and can be touched upon to bring the neglected and oppressed poor rural people into the

lit zones.

Rural finance is a matter of great concern in an agrarian economy like India where 70

percent of the population depends upon agriculture for their livelihood. Moreover, 40 percent

of our GDP is contributed by rural sector. Economic development of our country can be

achieved only with the upliftment of the village folk consisting of poor households, artisans,

agricultural labour, farmers etc. Finance being the life line of every commercial venture,

availability of adequate funds at reasonable terms is a must to ensure speedy economic

development in the rural areas. The Commercial banks, Cooperative Banks and Regional

Rural Banks play a significant role in financing different segments of rural sector. But these

rural credit institutions find themselves in a moribund state today. This is largely attributed to

financial sector reforms introduced in 1990's as a part of liberalization and globalization of

Indian economy.


Microfinance is a tool for individual development. Microcredit is a system of

providing credit to those people who cannot borrow money from the usual formal sources of

credit because they are too poor and have no collateral. They are usually women, and if they

borrow from traditional moneylenders, are exploited and then become pm of the continuing

cycle of poverty. Microfinance however includes both a savings and a credit component.

These schemes may be introduced by NGOs, Governments or local community groups or

finance businesses. When introduced by governments, such as the Vietnam Bank for

Agriculture and the Vietnam Bank for the Poor, or by finance organisations such as the Credit

Unions in Thailand, they generally focus solely on provision of, and repayment of, loans.

Local community groups may commence with savings first or design some method of

pooling resources before loaning money.

Grameen Bank. In 1983, Professor Muhanimed Yunus established the Grameen Bank

of Bangladesh for the purpose of poverty alleviation. Assumption of the Granieen Model is

that the rural poor just need access to credit to be able to climb out of poverty. Groups of five

people meet at Centre meetings each week where they make loan repayments, undergo

training and recite and discuss the 16 Decisions, "The 16 Decisions" are sometimes altered

slightly in other countries because of different social and cultural influences. Neverthelcss, all




GBR (Grameen Bank Replicas) members are expected to know and adhere to these

Decisions. Gow, Moore, Hoeksma and Wood reported on eight key features that practitioners

determined are essential for the Grameen Model to have any chance of success, These are:

the importance of the basic group; compulsory savings; regular repayments; realistic interest

rates; weekly meetings; intensive staff training; openness and transparency of transactions;

and constant performance monitoring.

Microfinance, according to Otero is “the provision of financial services to low-income

poor and very poor self-employed people”. These financial services according to Ledgerwood

generally include savings and credit but can also include other financial services such as

insurance and payment services. Schreiner and Colombet define microfinance as “the attempt

to improve access to small deposits and small loans for poor households neglected by banks.”

Therefore, microfinance involves the provision of financial services such as savings, loans

and insurance to poor people living in both urban and rural settings who are unable to obtain

such services from the formal financial sector.

SIGNIFICANCE OF THE RESEARCH STUDY

In India access to credit remains a significant challenge for poor / low income

household who live in remote regions and have hardly any asset and are viewed by formal

institutions as being "unprofitable". This has a potential for microfinance institutions to

explore. Thus; microfinance institutions have made the informal sector more advantageous

and welcoming for the poor and low income people. In spite of their fact that India today has

an extensive banking infrastructure, the importance of micro finance lies in the fact that the

formal / institutional banking sector has not lived up to its social responsibility of meeting the

financial needs of the poor.

The credit requirement of the poor in India has been estimated to the around Rs.

50,000 crore per annum. Against this requirement the credit outstanding of the poor with the

formal banking sector is stated to be Rs. 5000 crore or ten percent of total demand. Around

87 percent marginal farmers/landless laborers / poor do not access credit from the formal

banking sector. Most of the benefits have gone to relatively better off people. It is therefore;

as the banking sector is not able to meet the entire credit needs of the poor, it is necessary to

encourage the growth of microfinance institutions for substantial scaling up of the

microfinance to prevent exploitation of the poor from dominating money lenders in the rural

credit sector and to magnifying the scope of employment opportunities and poverty

eradication through micro finance creation. To meet out this lacuna, the microfinance




institutions have merged as key providers of financial services for the poor. The microfinance

which includes the small credit, micro saving and micro-insurance is gradually emerging as

one of the most effective strategies to alleviate poverty. It effectively generates employment

and sustains the income of the rural households by giving them often opportunity of work.

More efforts are needed to promote and strengthen microfinance to optimize them way

against poverty because there is a crying need for timely and adequate availability of funds

for rural finance for improving the income of the poor.

The microfinance institutions in the rural credit sector have made the access to rural

credit convenient through a particular subset of financial services which provide small loans

to very poor families, most often without any collateral. The loan can be for consumption,

production activities or for small business. This enables the rural people to raise their income

level and living standards. Microfinance helps the rural people to avail and create economic

growth opportunities. The access to credit as well as extending other financial products and

services to these people of low income group below poverty line includes women, small and

marginal families, artisans, agricultural laborers and share croppers. It also gives them access

to micro-insurance through which sudden expenses relating to serious illness or loss of asset

can be recovered. The facts reveal that interest rates charged by informal money lenders are

hidden than those charged by microfinance institutions, hence, there is an overwhelming

demand from all corners to protect the rural people from these extorters and play a vital role

by MFIs as vehicle to reach poor. Realising the importance of microcredit in the development

process, the government and RBI have taken various steps in this regard and have encouraged

financial institutions to make timely and adequate finance available to poor. to access to

institutional credit to poor sections of society, microfinance is one of the most sustainable and

effective tool.

OBJECTIVES OF THE RESEARCH STUDY

The main objectives of the proposed research study are as under :

1) To highlight the meaning and concept of micro finance.

2) To study the development of microfinance services in India.

3) To study microfinance and credit lending models for effective development of micro

finance.

4) To examine and analyse the impact of microfinance on the socio-economic

development of rural people of India.




5) To examine and analyse various issues and challenges related to microfinance in rural

areas of India.

6) To detect out the problems in the way of promoting micro financing in India.

7) To give some concrete suggestions, this may help microfinance institutions to make

an overall improvement in microfinance services in the rural areas of Indian economy

to accelerate the socio-economic upliftment of rural people.

HYPOTHESIS OF THE RESEARCH STUDY

The man hypothesis of the present research study is as under :

1) There is scope for substantially improving the quality and efficiency of service

delivery by the organizations providing micro finance services.

2) It is assumed that the government performs as a facilitator rather than of a regulator.

3) It is assumed that the poor people are more honest and sincere in repayment of

microcredit in comparison of other urban / metro and large borrowers.


The present research study mostly based is on the secondary data and where available

the data will be collected from the primary sources through administering a structured

questionnaire and by making personal contacts with the respective authorities. Their views

are incorporated where ever required to make the study more informative, effective and

meaningful.

The secondary data is collected from various issues of RBI publications, annual

reports of the banks and microfinance institutions, related books, journals and magazines and

from the office records of regional and district offices. The data is also collected from various

websites.

AN INTERNATIONAL SUCCESS STORY : GRAMEEN BANK

Dr. Yunus established Grameen Bank in 1983 in Bangladesh, with the goal of

assisting the disadvantaged by providing deposit and microcredit services for individual

customers and groups. The bank promotes the concept of savings, which reduces the reliance

on outside funds. It also offers microcredit through group loans, which not only abolishes the

need for collateral but also reduces costs. To date, the bank has experienced a high savings

rate and an excellent recovery rate for loans. In only a decade, the unit has developed from an




experimental organization into a financial institution that has branches throughout

Bangladesh.

Grameen Bank‟s recovery rate of 90 percent (with 94 percent of its loans made to

women) is high compared with that of the Bangladesh National Bank, which only recovers 25

percent of its loans. Grameen Bank‟s innovative design, open door loan policy, commitment

to gender equality, and its poverty alleviation potential has attracted interest from

governments and international assistance agencies throughout the world. The Grameen Bank

model is now being used as a reference in planning microcredit programs in other countries.

MICROFINANCE & ITS IMPACT IN DEVELOPMENT

Microfinance has a very important role to play in development according to

proponents of microfinance. UNCDF states that studies have shown that microfinance plays

three key roles in development. It helps very poor households meet basic needs and protects

against risks, is associated with improvements in household economic welfare, helps to

empower women by supporting women‟s economic participation and so promotes gender

equity. Otero illustrates the various ways in which “microfinance, at its core combats

poverty8”. She states that microfinance creates access to productive capital for the poor,

which together with human capital, addressed through education and training, and social

capital, achieved through local organisation building, enables people to move out of poverty.

By providing material capital to a poor person, their sense of dignity is strengthened and this

can help to empower the person to participate in the economy and society.

The aim of microfinance according to Otero is not just about providing capital to the

poor to combat poverty on an individual level, it also has a role at an institutional level. It

seeks to create institutions that deliver financial services to the poor, who are continuously

ignored by the formal banking sector. Littlefield and Rosenberg state that the poor are

generally excluded from the financial services sector of the economy so MFIs have emerged

to address this market failure. By addressing this gap in the market in a financially

sustainable manner, an MFI can become part of the formal financial system of a country and

so can access capital markets to fund their lending portfolios, allowing them to dramatically

increase the number of poor people they can reach. There is a need for all involved in

microfinance and development to ascertain what exactly has been the impact of microfinance

in combating poverty.




SUCCESS FACTORS

Essentials for Success : some of the successes factors are -

1. A three-to five-year Business Plan toward Institutional Financial Self-sufficiency

2. Skilled financial, as well as field managers

3. Increasing levels of institutional efficiency to current industry standards

4. Interest rated fees to clients that are appropriate to cover all costs and to attract

savings

5. A computerised management information system that produces financial statements

of international standard

6. An effective staff productivity incentive scheme.

The study by Goodwin-Green also identified a number of key success factors for

microfinance in commercial banks.

1. Create a small, specialised bank or a separate microfinance unit within a large

commercial bank

2. Treat savings as equally important as lending

3. Charge interest rates to cover all the costs of the lending products

4. Ensure excellent management information systems and portfolio management

5. Recruit staff from outside the bank and/or give staff specialist training, and

6. Find a champion or visionary who will see the program through to success.

Professor Yunus has observed that many poverty-focused programs throughout the

third world have failed because the benefits were taken up by the “not so poor”. Repayment

of loans is the largest problem faced by lending institutions, with success measured by high

repayment levels and misuse of loans (such as spending the loan on personal consumption,

education or payment of previous debts) is one of the reasons for those repayment problems.

Repayment is necessary for the lending organisation to be self-reliant and to ensure the

continuity of loans.

One of the key ingredients in a sustainable MFI is the training of the managers, staff

and field workers and the loan recipients who are commencing or increasing the output of

their small businesses or farming produce. They reports that one of the problems at the grass

roots levels is that the project cadres lack the skills to meet requirements of project

complicated monitoring and management systems. Training is needed, not just at the

beginning of a program, but throughout the life of the program. Managers of even the most

financially successful programs still ask for assistance in motivating the women in the

programs to make their repayments and to improve their income generating skills. Training is




considered to be an essential component of the success of microfinance schemes and the

CARD bank has become a Centre of Excellence with respect to training at all levels.

Similarly, the AIM in Malaysia has produced a simple training mLmud with a promotional

video, which is very helpful in explaining what AIM does. CASHPOR provide consultants

and trainers who travel across the world and train managers 'and assist the program managers

in problem solving the many issues that arise in financial and mcmagement areas.

CONCLUSION

Micro finance is a tool for sustainable socio-economic development. The complexity

of the Grameen Bank and other such schemes needs to be reduced in order to lessen the

expense associated with such schemes, and their long term viability can be ensured by linking

the project early with existing credit unions or rural banks. There is some evidence to suggest

that the community benefits economically, educationally and socially from the presence of

MFIs.

Therefore, there is a greater need for Micro Finance Institutions to carefully design

services that meet the needs of the poor and this can only be done when Micro Finance

Institutions understand their needs and the context within which the poor are working. If

Micro Finance Institutions are to meet their overall development objectives then they need to

ensure financial sustainability and outreach of financial services designed to meet the needs

of those most in need of such services.

REFRENCES

1. K.M. Gow, “Microfinance as a Component of Sustainable Economic Development in

Asia”

2. Mrs. Kuldeep Kaur, “Impact of Micro Finance on Socio Economic Development of

Rural Sector in India”

3. ACCU. (1999a). Microfirinrice irznovotioii iri credit zrriioris. Bangkok Association

of Asian Confedcration of Credit Unions.

4. The World Bank and Bangladesh Institute of Development Studies, Dhaka,

Bangladesh, March.

5. Conroy, J.D., Taylor, K.W. & Thapa, G.B. (Eds). (1995). Best practice of Oarikirig

with the poor. Brisbane: The Foundation for Development Cooperation.

6. Counts, A. (1996). Give LIS credit: How small loam today caii shape our tomorrow.

Times Books, Random House.

7. Khandker, S .R. (1995). Graiiieen Barik: peifor~i~aricaen d sustaina6ility.

Washington: World Bank.




A TRANSLATION STUDY OF THE SELECTED EXPRESSIONS ON EDUCATION

FROM LAXMAN MANE‟S „UPRA‟

DR. SURAJ SAWANT

Asst. Professor in English,

C.T.Bora College, Shirur, Dist. Pune,

Maharashtra - 412 210.

Abstract : Translation means a conversion of a language into another language. It is difficult

to define translation in specific words, one can give various definitions to show the different

ideas related to translations. Eugene A. Nida, significant theorist of translation who has

stated that, “the closest natural equivalent to the message of the source language first in

meaning and second in meaning”. Nida has expanded the scope of translation from

something to meaning and style. Translators like Gauri Deshpande, Sudhakar Marathe, Dilip

Chitre, Santosh Bhoomkar who translated various Marathi works have written about their

experiences in translation processes.

Keywords: Schoolmaster, akuba, village, education and damn it.

„Upra‟ is an autobiographical work of Laxman Mane. This book is translated as

„Upra: an Outsider‟ by A.K.Kamat. This is a story of a Dalit youth who has bitter experience

in his life that he has depicted in this autobiographical novel. He has given detailed

description of his family and its struggle to live life. Persons from nomadic tribes in

Maharashtra use words like „raand‟, „bhenchota‟, „bhadvya‟ and „kadu‟ quite often in their

conversation with the people in the same community. They are considered slang in so called

standard variety of Marathi. Educated Maharashtrians would abstain from the use of such

words in group, particularly in front of women and children. Kaikadys however use these

expressions frequently, simply because they do not mean the shame for them. Translator

therefore faces a serious problem with the translations of these informal expressions in

formal English. Many words and expressions like these are studied in this article. A well

known Marathi writer Sunita Deshpande stated that “Translation is more demanding than

creative writing because you are responsible for someone else‟s thought and writing there”.

Gideon Toury defines translation in the „Encyclopedic Dictionary of Semiotics‟ as,

“Translating is an act or a process which is performed or which occurs over and

across systemic borders. In the widest of its possible entity which is a constituent of a certain




cultural system is transformed into another semiotic entity which forms at least a potential

element of another cultural system, providing that some informational core retained invariant

under transformation and on its basis a relationship known as equivalence is established

between the resultant and initial entities”.

It is said that education is the milk of tigress and whoever drinks it roars. Education is

every human beings fundamental right that was declined to dalit people for thousands of

years. In Hindu religion there were four classes and they were ordered to do assigned work.

Right of education was denied by Manusmriti to innumerable people of India. Manusmriti

was thought to be a sacred book of Hindu religion which was burnt by Dr Ambedkar.

Mahatma Jotirao Phule opened schools for girls and dalits in 1848. Dr B.R.Ambedkar

inspired dalit people to get education. He also fought for their fundamental rights. He has

opened colleges for dalit people. He has given message to the dalit people as „educate,

aggregate, and agitate‟. He has brought reservations for them in education and government

services. Therefore large number of educated peoples increased in dalit communities.

Lack of education was one of most important factors in their social seclusions for a

long time. Naturally they had mixed reactions to the concept called education. Their

expressions on education related fields have typically dalit flavour. They are unemployed

because of not having higher education. Being uneducated they do not speak polished

Marathi. They use their own dialects. When they started schooling there were social

discrimination like touchability and non-touchability. Laxman could not get education in his

village, Nirgudi. He got education at places where his father went to earn their bhakari. So

their education started in unfavourable conditions.

In this article I have decided to study the translations of the texts related to education.

I have collected few expressions on education from this autobiography for comments. I have

divided these utterances in two main groups to comment on their translation. These groups of

expressions consist of the utterances that are translated wrongly. First group of expressions

consist of incorrect translations. In this group I have studied Marathi utterances from Upra

and their translations in English from „Upra: an Outsider‟. Here are a few examples.

ßrq y{kkyk ek#u Vkd] tkGqu Vkd] Egath rqyk cja okVya- g;ks f’kdrq;k vku~ gkfilj

gksrq;k!Þ ¼i"B]05½ is translated as “Why don‟t you kill him? Poor Laksha! Or burn him, and be

happy. To think that he will study and be an officer!” (Page, 21) Marathi utterance is in

imperative mode whereas translator translated it in an interrogative mode as „Why don‟t you

kill him?‟ Part of this expression Êgath rqyk cja okVya* is translated as „and be happy‟




wrongly. This utterance could be translated as „and feel good‟ which is more appropriate to

convey the same feelings. There is a difference between ^cja okVya* and ^vkuan >kyk*-

ßekLrjua ekjya dk\Þ ¼i"B]04½ is translated as “Did the schoolmaster beat you badly?”

(Page, 21) This expression is translated wrongly because his friends asked him „did the

schoolmaster beat you‟. They did not ask, ßekLrjua ybZ ekjya dk\Þ Translator added word

„badly‟ in this expression unnecessarily.

ßysdk fcufHkdkjkyk 'kkGk vklrh;k Og;\---Þ ¼i`"B]17½ This is translated as “You funny

guy! Do nomadic beggars go to school...” (Page, 36) This utterance by teacher is addressed

to Laxman‟s father. Teacher is not willing to admit Laxman in school because he belongs to

Kaikady tribe whose business is to weave baskets and give service to the villagers. It is

supposed that if he gets education he will not work like his forefathers for villagers. Teacher

fired his father and Laxman at the time of seeking admission in school. This utterance is

translated wrongly because „you funny guy‟ is added to its translation. Word „funny‟ in

Webster‟s thesaurus means „comical‟, „humorous‟, „jocular‟ etc. ^fcufHkdkjkyk* is translated as

„nomadic beggars‟ wrongly because nomadic tribes are not beggars. They wonder from

village to village to find work and survive. Marathi expression ^HkVds* is not there in source

text. Therefore its translation „nomadic beggars‟ becomes incorrect.

Here is a second group of expressions from the text. These expressions are converted

in English wrongly. These expressions are ^vkeph 'kkGk xk<okP;k ikBhoj pkyw vlk;ph-*

¼i"B]43½ is translated as „My school was moving on the donkeys back.‟ (Page, 69) This

expression is translated incorrectly because school does not move on the back of donkey.

Word to word translation diverts meanings of the source text. In fact donkeys are their

vehicle to travel from one village to another. Wherever they went on the back of donkeys,

they stayed there for few days and Laxman went to school of that village.

êh lkGar tkr Ogrks- d/kh cqMor Ogrks- tok T;k xkokr tk;pa] rok rhp vkeph 'kkGk-

dq.kh f’kowuch ?;k;pa uk;- jkrpk jkdsykpk [kanhy m?kM;koj oLrh-* ¼i`"B]44]45½ This is translated

as „I was going to school regularly. I had to go to the school of that village. They too were

not prepared to approach me. Our hut was in the open. At night, a kerosene lamp without a

glass cover was lit...‟ (Page, 72) êh lkGar tkr Ogrks- d/kh cqMor Ogrks-* is translated as „I was

going to school regularly‟. ^d/kh cqMor Ogrks* is not translated. So translation of this

expression becomes incomplete. ^tok T;k xkokr tk;pa rok rhp vkeph 'kkGk* is transformed

as „I had to go to the school of that village‟ incorrectly. This could be translated as „village to

which we went become my school‟. ^dq.kh f’kowuHkh ?;k;pa uk;* word ^f’kowuHkh* is translated as




„approach‟ wrongly. Correct translation of this word is „do not touch‟ because „approach‟

means to „go near‟. This expression refers to touchability and non-touchability. Essence of

the original is destroyed. ^jkrpk jkdsykpk [kanhy m?kM;koj oLrh---* Word ^[kanhy* is

translated as „lamp without a glass cover‟ incorrectly. Mr. Mane mentioned a lamp which is

not of without a glass cover.

^lkaP;kyk ck oGk; clyk] dh fcupqdrk eyk vkH;klkyk clfor gksrk-* ¼i"B]50½ This is

translated as „When father sat down to weave the basket, he would religiously make me sit

down to do my lessons.‟ (Page, 79) Time ^lkaP;kyk* as „in the evening‟ is notified in source

text. He has avoided to translate ^lkaP;kyk*. Word ^fcupqdrk* is translated as „religiously‟. He

could translate it as „unmistakenly‟ instead „religiously‟.

Finally here is a text which is translated incorrectly by the translator. First utterance

^vk;yk! iksjxa dkech djra;] oktora;ch vku iklch gksra;- vkrk g;kph 'kkGk can d’kh gks.kkj\ gs

ybZ f’kdya rj\ R;kP;k vk;yk uxap- gsyk ukikl >kya dh dk<qupa Vkdrks!* ¼i"B]71½ is translated

as “Damn it! The little fellow works, plays in the band and passes the exam too! Now, how

do we stop him from going to school! What if he studies too much? Damn it! It may invite

some problems! Let him fail once, and he will be out of school!” (Page, 106) ^vk;yk! iksjxa

dkech djra;] oktora; ch vku iklch gksra;-* is translated as „Damn it! The little fellow

works, plays in the band and passes the exam too!‟ ^R;kP;k vk;yk uxap- gs dk ukikl >kya dh

dk<qupa Vkdrks-* is translated incorrectly as „Damn it! It may invite some problems.‟ It should

be „if he fails he will be taken out of school‟. Word ^vk;yk!* is translated as „Damn it‟

wrongly. Both the expressions are crucial. First expression conveys that a father is not

willing to educate his son and the other expression connotes that a boy is eager to learn

further.

Thus there are some expressions which are translated wrongly by the translator. If

translator could not translate regional dialect correctly there will be misunderstanding

between the translated text and reader. For Example: êkLrj*] ^vkdqck*] ^lkaP;kyk*] ^vk;yk!*

These words are translated as „schoolmaster‟, „akuba‟ and „damn it!‟ Word ^lkaP;kyk* is not

translated. These words are important at the level of meanings; they are either translated

wrongly or avoided translation in English.

REFERENCES

1. Kamat, A.K. Upra: an Outsider (Trans.) Sahitya Akademi, 2003.

2. Mane, Laxman. „Upra‟. Granthali, Mumbai, 2003.

3. Nida, Eugene. A. „Towards a Science of Translation‟. Leiden: E.J.Brill, 1964.




TO STUDY OF TYPES OF CORPORATE EVENTS


Head Department of Commerce,

MES, Shri Dnyaneshwar Mahavidyalaya, Newasa,

Dist. Ahmednagar (MS), India (Affiliated to S.P. Pune University, Pune)


Abstract : Event management is the application of project management to the creation and

development of large scale events such as festivals, conferences, ceremonies, weddings,

formal parties, concerts, or conventions. It involves studying the brand, identifying its target

audience, devising the event concept, and coordinating the technical aspects before actually

launching the event. The process of planning and coordinating the event is usually referred to

as event planning and which can include budgeting, scheduling, site selection, acquiring

necessary permits, coordinating transportation and parking, arranging for speakers or

entertainers, arranging decor, event security, catering, coordinating with third party

vendors, and emergency plans. Each event is different in its nature so process of planning &

execution of each event differs on basis of type of event. A business perspective, event

management is of great importance. Creating events occasionally provide an incredible

opportunity to promote one‟s business. The more popular a brand is, the lesser hesitant

people will be for trying out new products launched by that brand.Event management skills

are, therefore, necessary for the company to get the required exposure and build a positive

image of the overall company as well as any brand in particular. They not only serve as a

chance for a well-established company to regain its importance by attracting an increasing

number of prospective customers but also enable a budding company to cultivate a sense of

interest in the common people about the products and services they offer. The Importance Of

Proper Event Management Planning. Proper event management planning is vital for any

successful event.

Key worlds:-Event, management, organizations, planning, Corporate Events



1. To know the concept of Event management.

2. To study of Types of Corporate Events


https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Project_management

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Festival

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Convention_(meeting)

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Target_audience



https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/License

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Catering






available information on Event management has been extensively used to complete the

research report. All the available Journals, Related books, Web, Articles, Publish and

unpublished information and Papers provided necessary information to the finalize the

research paper.

DEFINITION

Event: An event is something that happens at a given place and time for a reason with

someone or something involved.

Management: Management could be defined as the act of applying necessary skills

in all business and all human resourceful activities to accomplish desired goals and

objectives.

So, my definition of event management after joining the two is:

"The process of creatively applying necessary professional skills in organizing a focused

event for a target audience to achieved a desired objective."

TYPES OF CORPORATE EVENTS

According to Meeting Professionals International, more than $122 billion is spent

annually in the U.S. meetings industry. This money is most commonly spent at resort hotels,

city hotels, suburban hotels, conference centers, restaurants, country clubs, and convention

centers, but at the end of the day, some of that corporate meeting money is spent at nearly

every unique venue imaginable. It's no surprise then that corporate event planning and all that

goes with it is big business. While some larger corporations and organizations have corporate

event planners on staff or contract with an event planning agency, many others simply pass

along the job of planning corporate events to someone in HR or another department.

1. Seminar ,Conferences- Purpose: Organizations plan and hold these meetings with

targeted audiences, and provide them with relevant information. Description: Seminars are

usually shorter events, lasting a couple hours, ½ day, or even a whole workday. They have

single or multiple speakers and generally keep all participants together in the same space.

Conferences, on the other hand, typically have multiple sessions that occur concurrently that

are geared toward different interests, different positions or roles, and even skill level. They

are typically held at hotels, begin with a keynote session and then hold breakout sessions by

https://www.thebalance.com/what-is-a-human-resource-1918144

https://www.thebalance.com/how-to-prepare-for-a-small-business-conference-2951704




topic. A conference is usually planned for at least half of a day though generally conferences

span the course of one to two days or sometimes longer.

2. Trade Shows - Purpose: Organizations attend trade shows as a lead generation activity.

They may also choose to host or sponsor a trade show to reinforce their image as an industry

leader among those who attend, such as members, customers, prospects, and suppliers.

Description: Event planning for trade shows involves negotiating sponsorship rates for trade

show booth space, advertising and promotion at the event, and sometimes speaking

opportunities at the event for the leadership at your company to speak. Many logistical details

exist to assure that the trade show booth, promotional materials, giveaways, and staff arrives

on time for your company.

3. Executive Retreats and Incentive Programs - Purpose: This is where the big bucks are

spent on a per person basis. Executive retreats and incentive programs are often held at

luxury resorts in exclusive destinations, and they receive the most visibility in an

organization. Business development and organizational planning are typically the topics of

the agenda, but equal weight is given to enjoyable activities as part of the original incentive

and reward. Description: Executive retreats and incentive trips typically last between three

and five days and require attention to site selection, lodging, transportation, catering, business

meetings, and golf and other activities. Negotiation skills must be sharp because these

programs involve all aspects of event planning.

4. Golf Events - Purpose: One favorite event at every organization is to hold its annual golf

outing. Relationship management is the primary objective; however, business content must

always drive event planning, not the other way around. Description: Most golf courses prefer

their clients to reserve tee times either first thing in the morning or at 1 p.m.if you are not

renting out the course and clubhouse for the whole day. That can cause scheduling issues as it

relates to the business meeting content. During the planning phase, it is important to keep

internal clients on track, and not allow them to minimize the business time.

5. Appreciation Events - Purpose: These programs allow an event host to spend informal

time with its guests in a non-traditional environment, giving both parties an opportunity to

build a rapport and learn more about mutual business priorities. Appreciation events can

range from programs geared toward employee appreciation to those for showing client

appreciation, both of which have become a staple in corporate America. Description: There

are limitless possibilities and types of appreciation events that organizations hold throughout

the year. Common programs include:

1. Dinner and theater

https://www.thebalance.com/make-your-trade-show-exhibit-successful-2951158




2. Day at the race track

3. Suites at sporting arenas

4. Day and evening cruises

5. Private parties at music festivals

6. Holiday parties

7. Tickets to the most popular events in town

6. Company or Organization Milestones - Purpose: Company milestones provide a

business or organization the opportunity to celebrate a grand opening or other major

milestone or anniversary. Description: Company milestone events vary significantly in their

execution, but tend to follow similar programs as employee and client appreciation events.

These types of events tend to be celebratory in nature and can be limited to company

employees or expanded to include clients, vendors, and even the local community depending

on the company's size and stature in the community.

7. Team Building Events - Purpose: Team building events are meant to build upon the

company's strengths while building employee confidence, goodwill, and morale. Team

building events also provide the unique opportunity for employees to spend time together in a

non-work environment working together to solve puzzles and complete activities. Team

building events are meant to do just that - build stronger teams. Description: Corporate team

building events have been epitomized by outdoor and physical group activities like a ropes

course. In fact, there are companies all around the nation that specialize in hosting team

building events in their intricate indoor and outdoor courses. That said, team building events

can also focus on other types of team building activities from workshops to sensitivity

training.

8. Product Launch Events - Purpose: Product launch events can include internal product

launch meetings to inform all employees across the company about any upcoming products to

full-blown product launch parties to create a buzz surrounding the product's release among

customers and the media. Product launch events are most common for business to consumer

companies. Description: Product launch events are generally meant to generate media

coverage and industry buzz prior to a product's release. The launch event may include a

flashy introduction to the product along with an address from the companies most important

executives. Large product launches also tend to be very much a big party with well-known

guests, dinner, and entertainment depending on the industry.

9. Board Meetings and Shareholder Meetings - Purpose: Board meetings and shareholder

meeting both server extremely important purposes for both private and public companies.

https://www.thebalance.com/are-you-planning-this-year-s-employee-holiday-party-1223813

https://www.thebalance.com/tips-for-team-building-1918512






Board meetings serve as an opportunity for board members to meet to review business

performance and meet with company executives to make important decisions. Shareholder

meetings, on the other hand, provide companies the opportunity to share recent performance,

targets, future goals, and business strategies with its shareholders. Description: Annual, bi-

annual, or even quarterly meetings can be small internal meetings of board members or large-

scale prestigious business events for shareholders that range in size depending on the size of

the company and shareholder turnout.

REFERENCES

1. Special Events: Creating and Sustaining, a Book by Joe Goldblatt,November 2013

2. Event Planning: The Ultimate Guide To Successful Meetings, Corporate Events,

Fundraising Galas, Conferences, Conventions, Incentives and Other Special Events

Hardcover – 24 Apr 2009

3. www.thebalance.com

4. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Event_management

5. ttp://vivalivemusic.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/03/Event-Management.jpg

6. https://eventacademy.com/news/what-is-event-management

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Event_management

https://eventacademy.com/news/what-is-event-management




TO STUDY OF IMPACT OF GST ON BANKING SECTOR


MES, Shri Dnyaneshwar Mahavidyalaya, Newasa,

Dist.Ahmednagar (MS), India (Affiliated to S.P. Pune University,Pune)


Introduction : Goods and Services Tax (GST) is an indirect tax which was introduced in

India on 1 July 2017 and was applicable throughout India which replaced multiple cascading

taxes levied by the central and state governments. ... The GST is governed by a GST Council

and its Chairman is the Finance Minister of India.

Goods and Services Tax (GST) is an indirect tax reform which aims to remove tax

barriers between states and create a single market. For that to happen the constitution first

needs to be amended to remove different layers of governments' exclusive powers to

levy taxes

The Goods and Services Tax (GST) is a value-added tax levied on most goods and

services sold for domestic consumption. GST is a consumption based tax/levy. It is based on

the “Destination principle.” GST is applied on goods and services at the place where

final/actual consumption happens. GST is collected on value-added goods and services at

each stage of sale or purchase in the supply chain. Jun 24, 2017. GST is introduced by

eliminating many indirect taxes like Central Excise Tax, Sales Tax/VAT, and Service Tax etc.

Unlike present tax regime, GST is levied at the end user level of distribution of

goods. IGST means Integrated Goods and Service Tax. IGST is one of the three types

of GST (The other two are CGST and SGST. Jun 16, 20

Key worlds–GST, CGST and SGST, Banking



1. To know the concept of goods and service tax.

2. To Understand the to Study of Impact of GST on Banking Sector.



available information on Goods and Service Tax has been extensively used to complete the





research report. All the available Journals, Related books, Web, Articles, Publish and

unpublished information and Papers provided necessary information to the finalize the

research paper.

DEFINITION GOODS AND SERVICES TAX (GST)


services sold for domestic consumption. The GST is paid by consumers, but it is remitted to

the government by the businesses selling the goods and services.


services sold for domestic consumption. The GST is paid by consumers, but it is remitted to

the government by the businesses selling the goods and services. In effect, GST provides

revenue for the government.

IMPACT OF GST ON BANKING SECTOR AND ITS SERVICES

Coming to the financial sector, GST has a widespread impact on Banks and NBFCs

alike. In fact, services sector are more affected by GST than the manufacturing/trading sector.

Hence, financial services that are based on funds/fee/insurance, are seeing a major shift from

the previous tax scheme. Here‟s a look at the impact that GST will have on the banking

sector:

1. Registering branches to be a hassle: Under the previous tax regime, it was possible for

Banks with pan-India operations, to have a centralized registration. However with GST,

Banks and NBFC‟s will now have to obtain separate registrations for branches in every

state. This also enhances the compliance burden for filing returns substantially for them.

2. Leveraging and de-leveraging of ITC: Banks and NBFCs would generally opt for the

reversal of 50% of CENVAT credit in the previous tax scheme against input/output

services. The CENVAT credit could also be availed on no reversal conditions. However,

with GST in place, 50% of the credit has to be reversed, which leaves financial

institutions with a 50% reduced credit. Thus the cost of capital has been increased for

them.

3. Assessment and Adjudication are now troublesome: Earlier respective state regulators

would conduct the assessment for branches, however, now every registered branch and

NBFCs have to justify its stance on chargeability and utilization of Input Tax Credit in

different states. Also, the involvement of more than one adjudicating authority means a

difference of opinion may be possible, thus prolonging the process.

https://www.greengst.com/difference-between-current-tax-structure-and-gst/

https://www.greengst.com/step-by-step-guide-to-gst-filing/

https://www.greengst.com/input-tax-credit-simplified/




REVENUE RECOGNITION UNDER GST

1. Financial Services that are Account Linked: For account linked financial services, the

location of the recipient will be determined by the place of supply. In cases where service

recipients keep shifting bases, on the basis of better opportunities, location tracking will

be difficult and may pose problems, when it comes to the permanent/current address,

communication/KYC address of the service provider.

2. Financial Services that are Non-Account Linked: In the case of non-account linked

services, the location of the service provider is going to be considered as the location of

service supply. This will again be a problem for companies that are widespread in various

locations but operate from a back office, in a separate state.

3. Actionable Claims: Actionable claims were not considered as a service and hence were

non-taxable under the previous tax regime. With GST, however, they are now files under

supply of goods and will be taxable.

For the banking sector, the new GST regime brings in a lot of challenges in terms of

transaction, customer profiles, IT systems etc. for capturing both front and back-end data.

This will require vigilant IT operations and the ability to process high volume data, in order

to be ready for complete GST compliance. What do you think about the impact of GST on the

banking sector? Tell us your views in the comments section below.

REGISTRATION

As per Model GST Law, banks having branches in multiple States and Union

Territories (UTs) will be required to register in each such State and UT. Currently, banks

follow the Zonal or Regional structure where for one large State, there may be more than one

Zone and conversely, one Zone may comprise more than one State.

ACCOUNTS AND ADMINISTRATION

1. As GST stands today, transactions between two branches of same bank is set to trigger a

tax, which could prove to be cumbersome.

2. GST would require restructuring of accounting, administration and control mechanism in

the IT systems and processes of banks to be able to maintain financial records of each

State separately.

3. GST being levied on branch transactions could be cumbersome because of the enormous

number of financial transactions being carried out.

https://www.greengst.com/understanding-place-of-supply/

https://www.greengst.com/understanding-supply-of-goods/




SERVICES BY BANK

1. Some services by bank to a customer are centralized (Ex: Demat Account, Wealth

Management services, bigger home loans etc.) while some others are localized to

branches (Ex: Savings account, Personal loan, OD etc.).

2. Banks provide different types of services to customers like Debit Card, Credit Card,

Internet banking, Cheque Clearance, NEFT, RTGS, IMPS, Funds Transfer, Demand

Draft, Demat Account, Wealth Management services, home loans, Savings account,

Personal loan, etc.

3. Bank Head office also provides services to branches which may become taxable under

GST. The IT systems of banks need to be upgraded to meet all these requirements related

to multiple registrations, determining point of supply of services, compliance needs and

Input Service distribution.

4. Currently, the power to levy and collect Service Tax on all services is with the Centre.

With the introduction of GST, the States would also be empowered to levy GST on

services.

5. Accordingly, on the same activity, there would be two levies, namely Central GST

(CGST) and State GST (SGST), levied and administered by the Central Government and

State Governments respectively. For interstate supply of

6. Several activities of banks are currently exempt from service tax (Ex: Fund based

activities like interest payable on deposits / savings bank accounts and loans disbursed)

which would incur GST unless otherwise exclusively exempted.

7. It will be impossible for banks and finance institutions to value services provided by one

branch to another and then pay GST on that.

PLACE OF SUPPLY OF GOODS AND SERVICES

1. In banking industry, it‟s interesting to know the place of business.

2. Even though the person is having an account in a single location, he can do the

transactions across globe through internet banking.

3. The account holder can use his mobile or laptop and can do transactions from anywhere.

4. A Customer having an account in Chennai may do the transaction from Delhi and can

transfer money to persons from Kolkata having account in Mumbai. Here point of supply

identification is very much required for taxation purpose under GST.

5. As per law even though it can be tracked it will be cumbersome tasks and determining

point of supply of services would add significantly to the compliance cost.

https://taxguru.in/goods-and-service-tax/gst-council-approves-cgst-igst-bill.html

https://taxguru.in/goods-and-service-tax/decoding-gst-input-tax-credit-cgst-sgst-igst.html




6. Taking the example above, is it required to take the registration across India in each state

and Union Territory to abide by the laws of each state and Union Territory.

7. As per section 6(13), in the case of banking and other financial services (BOFS), the

place of supply shall be the „location of the recipient of service‟ on the records of supplier

of services.

8. In order to determine the GST, it would be necessary to determine the place of receipt of

supply of service and place of supply of service.

9. It is possible that actual recipient of such services may be different offices/ plants of the

customer situated in different States and therefore, there could be a doubt as to whether

each time, the bank would be required to capture the location of the recipient of service

for each transaction.

INVOICING

1. Section 25 of the Model Law requires uploading of invoices on Goods and Services Tax

Network (GSTN) by 10th of the next month.

2. It means wherever the recipient of service wants to avail input tax credit, each and every

document, where under certain fee or commission or charges have been charged and on

which GST is levied, is required to be uploaded electronically on the GSTN by the

service provider.

3. It is a fact that banks do not issue commercial invoices for every service rendered.

4. It would practically be a very difficult task to issue invoices for such small amounts and

uploading them on GSTN.

REPOSSESSION OF ASSETS OF DEFAULTERS

As per existing law and practice, when a bank repossesses assets from a defaulter of

loan and sells the same, VAT is paid by the bank as a „dealer‟ in terms of State VAT laws.

Treatment of this under GST will be quite interesting, which need to be looked upon.

DIFFICULTIES TO BANKING INDUSTRY

1. All the bank need to register for their all office location.

2. They have to maintain separate books of account to have a control for all input tax credit

and utilized and unutilized credit.




3. Due to registration of all location Many banks and financial institutions may be in for a

lot of trouble as they could just see the complexity in paying taxes increase under the

GST.

4. Complying with the requirements of reverse charge and partial reverse charge mechanism

would add to further compliance costs.

BENEFITS TO BANKING INDUSTRY

1. Bank will be able to set off their GST liabilities against credit received on purchase of

goods.

2. Under the existing CENVAT mechanism, banks are eligible to take partial credit of

excise duty and service tax paid on procurement of qualifying goods and services which

are used for provision of output service.

3. Banks do not get input tax credit of State VAT paid on any goods procured by them. As

all these indirect taxes will be subsumed in GST, banks will be able to take credit of GST

paid on procurement of goods as well.

4. Input tax credit is not allowed as per current CENVAT rules. But under GST regime

input tax credit will be allowed which would be used by a bank for making outward

supply in the course of

5. GST Will help to reduce tax evasion. Under GST doing business will be easy. The

increase in business will lead to additional demand of funds. Addition demand of funds

will lead to increase in number of transactions in the bank as the business and current

scenarios ask to go for digital transaction.

REFERENCES

1. GST Ready Reckoner, V.S. Datey, July 2017

2. GST Acts, Rules & Forms With Referencer 2017,CA Ashok Batra

3. Service Tax Manual (Fifth Edition) Paperback– 2016, CA Ashok Batra

4. India GST for Beginners (2nd Edition, June 2017) Paperback – 2016, Jayaram

Hiregange , Deepak Rao

5. Goods And Service Tax, Dr. Harsh Vardhan, Bharat 7th edition 2017.

6. https://en.wikipedia.org

7. www.cbec.gov.in/htdocs-cbec/gst/goods-rates-booklet-03July2017.

8. www.greengst.com/gst-impact-banking-sector-services

9. https://taxguru.in/goods-and-service-tax/impact-gst-banking-sector.html

https://taxguru.in/goods-and-service-tax/job-work-gst-regime.html

https://www.amazon.in/GST-Acts-Rules-Forms-Referencer/dp/935129823X/ref=sr_1_1?s=books&ie=UTF8&qid=1506157201&sr=1-1









https://en.wikipedia.org/

http://www.cbec.gov.in/htdocs-cbec/gst/goods-rates-booklet-03July2017

https://taxguru.in/goods-and-service-tax/impact-gst-banking-sector.html




JOB SATISFACTION AND MENTAL HEALTH OF ENGINEERING TEACHERS

DR. DILIP SHIVANE

HOD Psychology,

Gramonnati Mandal‟s, Arts, Commerce and Science College,

Narayangaon. Tal-Junnar, Dist-Pune.

ABSTRACT : The present study is an attempt to find out the difference in teaching attitude of

engineering teachers in relation to job satisfaction. A descriptive survey method was used. A

sample of 150 (150 male + 150 female) Engineering teachers was randomly selected.

Teacher's Job Satisfaction Scale by Mudgil, Muhar and Bhatia and Mental Health Battery by

Singh and Gupta (1983) were used to assess the teaching attitude and job satisfaction of

teachers. Mean, Standard Deviation and 't' test was used to analyze the data. The findings of

the study revealed : (i) Female teachers were found to possess more favorable attitude

towards teaching than male teachers; (ii) Highly job satisfied Engineering teachers found to

have better teaching attitude towards their profession than low job satisfied Engineering

teachers; and (iii) a significant positive relationship between teaching attitude and job

satisfaction of Engineering teachers was found.

KEY WORDS: Job satisfaction, Mental Health, Engineering teachers.

INTRODUCTION

In modern education discipline models, the main aim is to make students aware of

their behaviors and to teach them the ability of self-management (Tuncer, 1980). Group

guidance activities have developing, corrective, protective and adaptive features for student

development. It is an important element in modern education programs (Oncu, 1990).

A] Job Satisfaction:

The term 'Job satisfaction' refers to the perceived feelings of an employee towards his

job. It is a psychological feeling and has both rational and emotional elements. The job

satisfaction, being a global aspect is affected by a large array of variables such as salary,

promotion, age, experience, primary and secondary needs, opportunities for advancement,

congenial working conditions, competent and fair supervision, degree of participation in goal

setting, and perception of the employees. According to Good's 'Dictionary of Education'

(1973) job satisfaction means-'a quality, level or state of satisfaction which is the result of

various interests, attitude of person towards his job' The teacher is the most important and




effective factor in any educational system. In this regard the role of engineering college

teachers are very important. The teachers of engineering colleges are those persons who are

actively related to the activity of giving knowledge and principles related to the professional

practice of engineering. They help the students in acquiring the initial education for becoming

an engineer. Therefore, a teacher should have high academic and professional attainments

and should be allowed to work peacefully. The effectiveness of any educational system

depends upon the job satisfaction of the teacher. The job satisfaction of an engineering

college teacher is very necessary for progress of the higher education system and to make

them effective. Present study tried to study the job satisfaction of engineering college

teachers of Assam on the basis of their age groups and faculties

Job satisfaction essentially implies one of the most pleasant and keenly sought after

state of mind. It can be made a vehicle for the achievement of a higher end. Undoubtedly, it

can be said that the job satisfaction is widely accepted psychological aspect of effective

functioning in any profession. However, a more comprehensive approach requires that many

additional factors such as employer's age, health, temperament, desires and level of

aspiration, family relationship, social status, recreational out-lets, activity in organizations

etc. Should be considered. Those who are satisfied with their firms and their work are called

ideally adjusted. Job-satisfaction gives happiness, efficiency and success in one's

professional-activity. A worker who is satisfied with his work is characterized by his spirit of

devotion and determination for the fulfillment of the set goal. The concept of 'job-satisfaction'

has come from Industrial Psychology and it is now one of very extensively explored aspect of

human efficiency at work. When there is satisfaction in job, work is done with great care and

sincerity “Job satisfaction is the whole matrix of job factors that make a person like work

situation and be willing to lead for it without distaste at the beginning of this work day.”

B] Mental Health

In the mid-19th century, William Sweetzer was the first to clearly define the term

“mental hygiene”, which can be seen as the precursor to contemporary approaches to work on

promoting positive mental health. Ray, one of thirteen founders of the American Psychiatric

Association, further defined mental hygiene as an art to preserve the mind against incidents

and influences which would inhibit or destroy its energy, quality or development. At the

beginning of the 20th century, Clifford Beers founded the National committee for mental

hygiene and opened the first outpatient mental health clinic in the United States.

Mental health can be seen as a continuum, where an individual‟s mental health may

have many different possible values. Mental wellness is generally viewed as a positive

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_Psychiatric_Association



http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clifford_Beers

http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=National_Committee_for_Mental_Hygiene&action=edit&redlink=1



http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clinic

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Continuum_(mathematics)




attribute, such that a person can reach enhanced levels of mental health, even if they do not

have any diagnosable mental health condition. This definition of mental health highlights

emotional well-being, the capacity to live a full and creative life, and the flexibility to deal

with life‟s inevitable challenges. Many therapeutic systems and self-help books offer methods

and philosophies espousing strategies and techniques vaunted as effective for further

improving the mental wellness of otherwise healthy people. Positive psychology is

increasingly prominent in mental health. A holistic model of mental health generally

includes concepts based upon anthropological, educational, psychological, religious and

sociological perspectives, as well as theoretical perspectives from personality, social, clinical,

health and developmental psychology.

A wellness model includes one developed by Myers, Sweeney and Witmer (2004). It

includes five life tasks -essence or spirituality, work and leisure, friendship, love and self-

direction-and twelve sub tasks-sense of worth, sense of control, realistic beliefs, emotional

awareness and coping, problem solving and creativity, sense of humor, nutrition, exercise,

self -care, stress management, gender identity, and cultural identity-are identified as

characteristics of healthy functioning and a major component of wellness. The components

provide a means of responding to the circumstances of life in a manner that promotes healthy

functioning. Most of the US Population is not educated on Mental Health. Lack of a mental

disorder See also mental disorder

Mental health can be socially constructed and socially defined; that is, different

professions, communities, societies and cultures have very different ways of conceptualizing

its nature and causes, determining what is mentally healthy, and deciding what interventions

are appropriate. Thus, different professionals will have different cultural and religious

backgrounds and experiences, which may impact the methodology applied during treatment.

Research has shown that there is stigma attached to mental illness. In the United Kingdom,

the Royal College of Psychiatrists organized the campaign Changing Minds (2003) to help

reduce stigma. World Health Organization (2005) Promoting Mental health concepts,

emerging evidence, practice. A report of the World Health Organization, Department of

Mental Health and Substance Abuse in collaboration with the Victorian Health Promotion

Foundation and the University of Melbourne.

The Mental Health (Care and Treatment) (Scotland) Act 2003 came into effect on 5

October 2005. This law says how people with mental illnesses, learning disability or other

mental disorders can be given care and treatment. The successful performance of mental

function, resulting in productive activities, fulfilling relationships with other people and the

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Emotion

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Creativity

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Positive_psychology

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Holism

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Anthropology

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Education

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Psychology

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Religion

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sociology

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Personality_psychology

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Social_psychology

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clinical_Psychology

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Health_psychology

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Developmental_psychology

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Psychology

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wellness

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Labour_(economics)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Leisure

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Friendship

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Self-esteem

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Self-efficacy

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Emotional_intelligence



http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Coping_skill

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Problem_solving

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Creativity

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Humour

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nutrition

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Exercise

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stress_management

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gender_identity

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cultural_identity

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mental_disorder

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Community

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Society

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Culture




ability to adapt to change and cope with adversity; from early childhood until late life, mental

health is the springboard of thinking and communications skills According to the UNO Rules

on Equalization of Opportunities for People with Disabilities, mental illness is “a disorder,

illness or disease that affects thought processes, perception of reality, emotions or judgments,

or that result in disturbed behavior”. Complete only when the mental health problem is the

cause for consultation. Mark all that the legislation for those suffering from mental illness is

concerned with custody and care, and also with responsibility for any crimes committed. A

relatively enduring state of being in which an individual is reasonably satisfying to self, as

reflected in his/her test for living and feeling of self-realization. Since the founding of the

United Nations the concepts of mental health and hygiene have achieved international

acceptance.

REVIEV OF RELATED LITERATURE

Singh (2007) indicated that job satisfaction of teacher educators was positively but not

significantly related to their attitude towards teaching. The job satisfaction of male and

female teacher educators was also positively but not significantly related to their attitude

towards teaching. Ghanti and Jagadesh (2009) revealed that teachers working in government

and private secondary schools did not differ significantly in their attitude towards teaching

profession and male and female teachers' did not differ significantly in their attitude towards

teaching profession. Ghosh and Bairagya (2010) in their study concluded that female

secondary teachers possess more favorable attitudes towards teaching profession than male

teachers. Benjamin et al. (2011) also supported this view that female student teachers had

more favorable attitude towards teaching profession than male student teachers. Lal and

Shergill (2012) revealed that female degree colleges' teachers have more favorable attitude

towards education as compared to their male counterparts. Male and female teachers are not

different from each other on job satisfaction variable.

In the mid-19th century, William Sweetzer (1998) was the first to clearly define the

term “Mental hygiene”, which can be seen as the precursor to contemporary approaches to

work on promoting positive mental health. Isaac Ray, one of thirteen founders of the

American Psychiatric Association, further defined mental hygiene as an art to preserve the

mind against incidents and influences which would inhibit or destroy its energy, quality or

development. At the beginning of the 20th century, Clifford Beers founded the National

Committee for Mental Hygiene and opened the first outpatient mental health clinic in the

United States. Perspectives

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Isaac_Ray


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clifford_Beers




http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clinic

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States




Most of the US Population is not educated on Mental Health. Lack of a mental

disorder See also, Mental disorder:- Mental health can also be defined as an absence of a

major mental health condition (for example, one of the diagnoses in the (Diagnostic and

Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders) though recent evidence stemming from positive

psychology (see above) suggests mental health is more than the mere absence of a mental

disorder or illness. Therefore the impact of social, cultural, physical and education can all

affect someone's mental health. Cultural and religious considerations

Mental health can be socially constructed and socially defined; that is, different

professions, communities, societies and cultures have very different ways of conceptualizing

its nature and causes, determining what is mentally healthy, and deciding what interventions

are appropriate. Thus, different professionals will have different cultural and religious

backgrounds and experiences, which may impact the methodology applied during treatment.

Research has shown that there is stigma attached to mental illness.

In the United Kingdom, the Royal College of Psychiatrists organized the campaign

Changing Minds (1998-2003) to help reduce stigma. Many mental health professionals are

beginning to, or already understand, the importance of competency in religious diversity and

spirituality. The American Psychological Association explicitly states that religion must be

respected. Education in spiritual and religious matters is also required by the Association.

Keyes, Corey (2002). “The mental health continuum: from languishing to flourishing in life”.

Witmer, Sweeny (2000). “A holistic model for wellness and prevention over the

lifespan”. Myers, Sweeney, (2004). “A factor structure of wellness: Theory, assessment,

analysis and practice.” “The wheel of wellness counseling for wellness: A holistic model for

treatment planning”.Definitions of mental health: - “The psychological state of someone

who is functioning at a satisfactory level of emotional and behavioral adjustment”. “Mental

health is a term used to describe either a level of cognitive or emotional well-being or an

absence of a mental disorder”. The Mental Health (Care and Treatment) (Scotland) Act 2003

came into effect on 5 October 2005. This law says “How people with mental illnesses,

learning disability or other mental disorders can be given care and treatment. The successful

performance of mental function, resulting in productive activities, fulfilling relationships with

other people and the ability to adapt to change and cope with adversity; from early childhood

until late life, mental health is the springboard of thinking and communications skills”.

Usop, Askandar, Langguyuan-Kadtong and Usop (2013) concluded that the teachers of

Division of Cotabato City displays a high level of performance. They were contented with

their job satisfaction facets such as school policies, supervision, pay, interpersonal relations,

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mental_disorder

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diagnostic_and_Statistical_Manual_of_Mental_Disorders



http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Community

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Society

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Culture

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mental_health_professional

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spirituality

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_Psychological_Association

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Religion

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spirituality




opportunities for promotion and growth, working conditions, work itself, achievement,

recognition, and responsibility. This implies that a teacher's satisfied with their job is also a

productive one. Furthermore, if the teachers contented with their job, they will develop and

maintain high level of performance. Teaching learning process make more efficient and

effective that could produce high competitive learners. Kimengi (2014) found that there was

no strong relationship between attitudes towards teaching and job satisfaction among

secondary school teachers with respect to the following variables: Age, Type of school,

Teaching experience and Mother's occupation. However, there was strong relationship with

respect to: Subjects taught, Highest education attained, Position of responsibility, Father's and

Mother's occupation, Father's and Mother's highest education attained. Sandeep and

Prahallada (2015) revealed that all the components of teacher attitude- teaching profession,

classroom teaching, child centered practices, educational process, pupils, teachers and total

attitude were significantly and positively correlated with job satisfaction.

STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM

The present study has been justified on the ground that no such exploratory work has

been done giving emphasis on job-satisfaction and mental health of teachers working in

Engineering Colleges of Pune Districts.


“Job Satisfaction and mental health of Engineering College Teachers of Pune Districts.

1. To study the relationship between teaching Mental Health and job satisfaction of

engineering teachers.

2. To study the difference if any in mental health component of engineering teachers

HYPOTHESES

On the basis of theoretical background and logical supposition, in the present study

the following hypotheses are framed.

1. There is no significant difference in job satisfaction and mental health of Engineering

College teachers of Pune Districts on the basis of their age groups.

2. There is no significant difference in job satisfaction and mental health between technical

and non- technical faculty members of Engineering Colleges of Pune Districts.




RESEARCH METHODOLOGY : Descriptive Survey Method was used to conduct the

study.

SELECTION OF THE SAMPLE : By using stratified random sampling method the researcher

selected 300 sample teachers from 6 Government (both under State Government and Central

Government) Engineering Colleges/Institutions of Pune Districts. For this research, one hundred and

twenty (150 male +150 female) Engineering college were selected from Pune district from

Engineering college. Engineering College

TOOLS

1. Teacher's Job Satisfaction Scale by Mudgil, Muhar and Bhatia to assess the job

satisfaction.

2. Mental Health Battery - By Singh and Gupta (1983) This test is consists of 130 items

designed to measures six component of mental health. Emotional stability Over-all

adjustment, Autonomy, Security-Insecurity, Self-concept, Intelligence.

LIMITATION OF THE STUDY

1. The study is confined to 6 Government and Non-Government Engineering Colleges /

Institutions of Pune District

2. The present study is primarily concerned with the job satisfaction of teachers in

Government Engineering Colleges (degree) of Pune District and not with the teachers

working in private Engineering Colleges/ Institutes (degree and diploma) of Pune District

3. The study is also not concerned with the teachers working as contractual basis in these

Engineering Colleges.

STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES USED

Mean, Standard Deviation and 't'-test were used to obtain the results.

'T-test, Mean Job Satisfaction Scores of teachers of Different Engineering Colleges in

terms of Categories/Faculties

Job Satisfaction

Scores & Faculty

t df Sig.

Equal variances assumed .094 246 925(N.S.)

Equal variances not assumed .088 126.824 .930(N.S.)




Relationship between teaching Mental Health and job satisfaction of Engineering

Teacher

Variables Number Mean SD 'r'

Mental Health 150 3.971 1.389

0.516** Job Satisfaction 150 244.07 28.171

**Significant at 0.01 level of significance

Table 2 depicts that co-efficient of correlation between teaching Mental Health and

job satisfaction of Engineering Teachers is 0.516 which is significant at 0.01 level of

significance. So, the null hypothesis, i.e., “There is no significant relationship between

teaching Mental Health and job satisfaction of Engineering Teachers” is Rejected. Hence,

there exists a positive correlation between these parameters. It indicates that teaching Mental

Health and job satisfaction of engineering college students are positively correlated with each

other. So it could be concluded that Engineering college have better teaching Mental Health

towards their profession if they are more satisfied with their job.

Mean and SD for Mental Health Variables among male and Female of Engineering

Teachers

*** P<0.001 ** P<0.01 *P<0.05

The significant difference (t (299=2.03 p<0.01) between male and Female of

Engineering Teachers group was found on emotional stability in which the mean score of the

teachers with female teachers was 71.00 and mean score of the male teachers was 66.00.The

significant difference (t (299=1.61 p<0.01) between female Teachers and male teachers group

was found on Overall adjustment in which the mean score of the teachers with female

teachers was 52.00 and mean score of the male teachers 49.00.The significant difference (t

Factor

Male Engineering

Teacher

Female Engineering

Teacher

„t‟

p

M SD N M SD N

Emotional stability 65 6 150 71 8 150 2.03** 0.01

Overall adjustment 50 7 150 52 9 150 1.61** 0.01

Autonomy 57 4 150 56 9 150 1.97** 0.01

Security-Insecurity 56 8 150 64 10 150 3.28** 0.01

Self-concept 80 10 150 72 6 150 2.72** 0.01

Intelligence 54 5 150 46 8 150 1.78** 0.01




(299=1.97 p<0.01) between male and Female of Engineering Teachers group was found on

Autonomy in which the mean score of the teachers with female Teachers was 56.00 and mean

score of the male teachers was 57.00. The significant difference (t (299=3.28 p<0.01)

between female Teachers and male Teachers group was found on Security-Insecurity in

which the mean score of the teachers with female Teachers was 64.00 and mean score of the

male teachers was 56.00. The significant difference (t (299=2.72 p<0.01) between female

teachers and male Teachers group was found on Self-concept in which the mean score of the

teachers with female Teachers was 72.00 and mean score of the male teachers was 79.00.The

significant difference (t (299=1.78 p<0.01) between female teachers and male Teachers group

was found on Intelligence in which the mean score of the teachers with female Teachers was

46.00 and mean score of the male teachers was 53.00

Graph: Mental Health.

Job Satisfaction Scores of Engineering college teachers in terms of Age Groups

Age Number Mean Standard Deviation

Higher Age Group 21 238.14 20.90

Middle Age Group 172 223.87 29.86

Low Age Group 55 235.75 29.92

To investigate the job satisfaction of Engineering College teachers on the basis of

their age groups. To study the job satisfaction of teachers in relation to their age, teachers of

different institutions are grouped into three categories on the basis of their age level :- Higher

Age Group (HAG), Middle Age Group (MAG) and Low Age Group (LAG).Higher Age




Group (HAG) = Above 50 (1 Standard Deviation above mean, i.e. 42+8)Middle Age Group

(MAG) = between 34 and 50 ( between 1-Standard Deviation below and above mean)Lower

Age Group (LAG) = Below 34(1 Standard Deviation below mean, i.e. 42-8)

DISCUSSION & CONCLUSION OF RESULTS

It is observed that the lower age group and middle age group teachers are less

satisfied with the salary grade, as their income is not sufficient to maintain their family at

their desired level of standard. Level of job satisfaction differs significantly among the

teachers working in the four institutions. It has been seen that Job satisfaction in terms of

faculty there is no significant differences In the present study it is established that the job

satisfaction and mental health is higher in case of higher age group teachers. It is seen from

the study that with the increase in age of the teachers, their salary and other facilities also

increase. It has been seen that Job satisfaction in terms of faculty there is no significant

differences. The work load, A.I.C.T.E.guidelines, UGC pay scale and other conditions are

same for both the faculties. There are a number of parameters related to the job satisfaction of

Engineering College teachers, which need further research studies. It was found that there is a

significant difference in teaching attitude of low and high job satisfied Engineering college

teachers. Highly job satisfied Engineering college teachers found to have better teaching

attitude towards their profession than low job satisfied senior Engineering Teachers. It was

found that there is a significant relationship between teaching mental health and job

satisfaction of Engineering Teachers. So it could be concluded that Engineering college

students have better teaching attitude towards their profession if they are more satisfied with

their job. Studies reviewed on attitude towards teaching profession reveal that female

teachers possess a high degree of attitude than male teachers and teachers with positive

attitudes tend to encourage their students. Further the present study reveal that attitude

towards teaching profession are a significant predictor of job satisfaction. Highly job satisfied

teachers possess more favorable attitude towards teaching as compared to low job satisfied

teachers. A strong positive relationship was found between teaching attitude and job

satisfaction of teachers.

SUGGESTIONS

1. Working facilities and workload of teachers should be as per the international norms

2. Necessary efforts from concerned management committees are required to introduce new

schemes and modifications of the existing policy in security of job, service rule, regular

salary and retirement benefit of Engineering College teachers.




3. .Arrangement to be made at institution level for job enrichment, job variation among the

Engineering College teachers in academic and related activities to break the monotony of

work and to brig new innovations.

4. All Management system of the Engineering Colleges should be reformed in such a way

that, the teachers can take part in the process of decision making on the matters related to

the interest of the institution.

5. Job satisfaction of Engineering Colleges' teachers is the most important for the growth

and development of their institutions. In this case all the groups are reasonably satisfied

with their job but they differ in terms of levels of satisfaction. It is suggested that the

administration take suitable measures to increase the level of job satisfaction of teachers.

REFERENCES

1. Abraham, Amit (1994). Job Satisfaction and Teacher Effectiveness, 'A study on College

Teachers; IndianJournal of Psychometry and Education Vol.25 (1&2).

2. Adams, D. Ve Hamm, M. (1997). New Designs for Teaching and Learning Promoting

Active Learning in Tomorrows Schools. S. Francisco: Jossey-Bass Publishers

3. Ataman, A. (2000) Sınıf yönetimi (Ed: L. Küçükahmet), Ankara: Nobel Yayıncılık, 213-

230.

4. Arora, R.K. (1986).'Teachers' Anxiety at Different Levels of Job Satisfaction', Indian

Educational Review,Vol.21 (1).

5. Buch M.B(Ed) (1992).Fourth Survey of Research in Education. New Delhi.N.C.E.R.T.

6. Das, Lakshahira & Panda,B.B. (1995). 'Job Satisfaction of College and Higher Secondary

Teachers';Experiments in Education, Vol.23 (3)

7. Garrett, Henry. E (1981). Statistics in Psychology and Education. Bombay:Vakils. Feffer

and Simsons Ltd.

8. Gupta, S.P. (1991). Statistical Methods, New Delhi: Sultan Chand & Sons Publishers.

9. Kamalesh, M.L. (1986). Methodology of Research in Physical Education and Sports. New

Delhi:Metropolitan Boo.

10. Koul, Lokesh (1997). Methodology of Educational Research, Vikash Publishing House

Pvt, Ltd. NewDelhi.

11. Rao, S.Narayana (1986).Work Adjustment and Job Satisfaction of Teachers; Delhi: Mittal

Publishers.

12. Choudhury M (2002). A study on Job Satisfaction among College Teachers under

Gauhati University.Ph.D. Thesis. Gauhati University.

13. Indian Streams Research Journal • Volume 3 Issue 3 • April 2013 6




BUDDHIST CAVE TEMPLES

DR. DIGAMBAR JANARDHAN SONAWANE

Head Dept.of History,

Shri Dnyneshwar Mahavidyalaya, Newasa.

E-mail [email protected] Mob-9850221449

Cave temples were constructed during Satavahana period. V.D.Mahajan has observed

that, “Almost all the caves so far found in the Deccan are dedicated to Buddhism and they

were all excavated during the Satavahana period. These Buddhist caves were of two kinds,

Chaityagrihas or temples and Layanas or residential quarters for Bhikshus.” Chaityas were

treated as means of symbol worship and Viharas were also known as Sangaram where

Buddhist Sangas were taking rest. Dr. R.S.Gupte has pointed that ,“More than 450 Buddhist

caves in western Deccan in general and Maharashtra in Particular is available le on large

scale for public worship.” All these caves amply testify the occurrence of Buddhist art and

architecture on large scale in Satavahana period.

About characteristics of Buddhist art, V.D. Mahajan has observed that, “The

Chaityagrihas had vaulted roofs and horseshoe shaped windows nover the entrance. They

also had interiors consisting of a nave and side aisles with a small stupa at the inner circular

end. A Layana consists of a hall surrounded by a number of cells, each cell containing a

stone-bench for a monk to sleep on. One or two rock-cit cisterns were attached to every

Layana. The repairs of caves, villages were generally donated. In the Satavahana period

Buddhist cave temples were constructed out of donations given by Shrsesties or trade gilds

which were just like modern corporate industries. In one of the inscriptions at Kanheri caves,

reference appears regarding donation made by Shreties for the construction of Buddhist

Chaitya at Rajtadag today‟s Aurangabad. Ranade has further pointed that the scriptural are of

Satavahana was ornamental and having rhythm in the presentations. Further he has noted that

there might be a royal dancer in the court of Satavahanas whose replica is portrayed on the

walls of Rajtadag caves as a dancing panel like orchestra having band musical instruments

presented together. This shows how dance along with classical music was developed and

trained in the Satavahana period.

The progress of Buddhism is shown by the presence of the Buddhist caves and epigraphs at

Pitalkhora, Nasik, Bhaja, Bedsa, Kondane and Kuda and the Buddhist Stupas at Bhattiprolu,

amaravati, goli, Ghantasala and Gummadidurru. Not only did the Satavahana kings





encourage Buddhism, the royal example was followed by feudatories, officials, merchants,

craftsmen and women. It appears that, there was some sort of a competition among them to

establish more and more caves and Viharas for the Buddhists.” Dr. R.S.Gupte has studied

these caves in western India. Junnar is one of the largest settlements of Buddhist people

which show four groups of caves.

In Buddhism Buddha Dhamma and Sangha were three great institutions. Bikus were

propagators of religion. They were doing selfless service to the society. For their dedication

and devotion and sacrifice Mahajan has observed that, “For the feeding of Bhikshus,

sometimes pieces of land were given and sometimes cash endowments were made. Very

often, this money was deposited in the guilds. The Bhikshus occupied the caves only during

the rainy season and for the rest of the year they were on their tours.” The cave temples were

the places of rest during hot son and heavy rains rainy season. The disciples were coming

there with great numbers for seeking gospel in these Viharas. In some cases some special

arrangement was also made.

Mahajan has observed that, “It appears that certain caves were reserved for certain

sects of the Buddhist monks. A cave at Nasik was reserved for the Bhadrayana Bhikshu

Samgha. A cave at Carle was reserved for the Mahasamghikas.” This is evident how special

care was taken to protect the interest of selfless religious propagators.

Romila Taper has observed that, “The Satavahanas were the initial transmitters of

goods and ideas from one to the other.” In the field of art also Satavahanas were able

translate their ideas into reality with great sincere efforts.

V.D. Mahajan has rightly observed that, “The Satavahana period is famous for its

great contribution to Indian art. Numerous sites in Andhra like-Goli, Jaggayapata,

Bhattiprolu, Ghantasala, Amaravati and Nagarjunajkonda have revealed the remains of stupas

and sculptures of this period.” The glory of Satavahanas is reflected through these remains.

According to Chaurasia, “Many of the Buddhist caves in the Deccan were excavated

during the period and they bear witness at one to the piety of their builders and the infinite

patience and high level of artistic skill possessed by the architects of the times. These

institutions were maintained by grants of lands and villages as well as by the investment of

funds in the craft guilds.” This shows a close link between economic support and artistic

glory.

It has been observed that, “There were guilds of potters, weavers, oil pressers, corn

dealers, bamboo workers etc. The guilds acted as banks receiving deposits at stipulated rates

of interest.” These were contributing for the development of art and architecture.




Amravati was a flourishing center of art. It has been observed that, “The stupas of

Amaravati are the largest and most interesting. The drum of the stupa was 20 feet high with

its four rectangular offsets. It was surrounded by a railing 192 feet in diameter and 600 feet

in circumstance. It was 13 or 14 feet high above the payment. The railing outside enclosed

the Pradakshinapath of about 15 feet wide, “having free standing pillars at intervals bearing

miniature stupas or similar symbols as their capitals. Thus Amaravati stupa was unique in

character. Sir John Marshall has described it as, “there is greater originality, freedom of

treatment, spontaneous exuberance in the art of Amaravat. The reliefs of Amaravati indeed

appear to be as truly Indian in style as those of Bharhut and Ellora. They followed as a

natural sequence on the Mauryan art, when that is was finding expression in more

conventionalized forms. They have inherited certain motifs and types which filtered from the

North-west but these elements have been completely absorbed and assimilated without

materially influencing the indigenous character of the sculptures”. Thus the greatness of

Amravati became evident in the Satavahana period both in art, architecture and sculptures.

According to B.C. Sen, “Female figures with slim waists and a symmetrical

arrangement of physical beauties, loosely dressed with garments of fine texture, full of

softness of a slender creeper and inviting gracefulness, deeply sensitive of the luxuries of

nature, sometimes playing upon musical instruments in beautifully artistic poses, rather a

little coquettish, they are found in the company of young men who seem to possess keen

powers of appreciation. If we have eyes to see per chance, we may catch a glimpse of the

exchange of significant looks passing between a maid in the corner and her lover in the

opposite side giving flushes of sensuous suggestion which are not easy to miss.” Thus the

glory of Amravati has been appreciated by art critics for their aesthetic sense.

V.D. Mahajan has further observed that “The Amaravati school “struck a quite novel

and unique chord in the symphony of Indian plastic art. In the achievement of pure form in

all its elegant modulation, in the subtle delineation of the elusive moods and sentiments of

human heart and in the picturesque representation of the vibrations of the stirring soul, it

stands unrivalled”. Thus amplifies how art was developed in a systematic manner to manifest

social milieu and cultural ethos of the period.

Cave tempels were not only centers of worship; they were also centers of religious

education. It seems a center of learning at Nagarjunkonda, which was a Buddhist University

of south India in the Satavahana period. The Buddhist art centers and educational centers had

all India connectivity. The scholars from Nalanda and Taxisheela used to visit Deccan and

scholars from south India were visiting North India. This kind of upward mobility shows that




south Indian Buddhism was equally having respect and status in the Pan India Buddhsit

activities. To erect well developed cave tempels was a gaigantic task acquiring land, selecting

rocks and scccoping of the caves was a continuous process which was not possible without

royal support. The renovation of religion is possible only when political benevelance is

respected and equally practiced in a systematic manner. The study of Buddhist art in the

Satavahana period brings two more facts to the light. One among those is well organized

artists bands in the Satavahana domin and secondly croos political support generated by

heads of Buddhist religion for benevelane welfare works. Buddhism received a great Philip

even better than Wakataka and Chalukya period, because, the Satavahana rulers were not

making any difference on the basis of religious followers in their communities.

REFERENCES

1. Choudhari K.C. “History of Ancient India”,Central Educational Enterprises, Calcutta.

2. Shatry K.N. “History of South India”

3. Kosambi D.D “Indian History”,Popular Publishers, Mumbai.

4. Tripathi R.S. “History of Ancient India”,Motilal Banarshidass, Delhi

5. Banerjee A.C. “History of India”,Mukharjee Publishers, Calcutta.




EDUCATION IN THE 19TH

CENTURY MAHARASHTRA

DR. JAGDISH CHHABURAO SONAWANE


Department of History,

Arts, Commerce & Science College Sonai, Dist-Ahmednagar.

Email - [email protected] Cell - 9423210260

The pre-colonial Indian society was a Caste-based, characterized by Endogamy,

Rigid, Closed Hierarchical Structure and Brahmanical Patriarchy. The upper castes had

exercised a pure control over the Hindu society by enjoying all kinds of privileges. At the

same time the lower castes, untouchables and women were exploited and made to serve for

the upper castes and the Brahmanical Supremacy was maintained. According to Dr.

Babasaheb Ambedkar, the caste system is not only division of the labor but it is also a

division of laborers.1 In the Hindu society the inequality is regarded as the religious doctrine

which is preached very consciously and purposely and so inequality is the soul of Hinduism.

So this Brahmanical supremacy was maintained by denying right to education to the lower

castes, dalits and women. In Maharashtra, the Brahmanical Supremacy reached its zenith

under the rule of the Peshwas (Brahmins).

The British East India Company established British rule in Maharashtra by defeating

Peshwa Bajirao II in 1818 A. D. Mountstuart Elphinstone took over as the first Governor of

the Bombay Presidency. The nineteenth century is regarded as the period of transaction. The

Government of East India Company had accepted the responsibility to educate the masses by

the order of Charter Act of 1813. The 43rd

clause of this Act empowered the Governor

General to appropriate “a sum of not less than one lakh of rupees” in each year out of “the

surplus territorial revenues” for revival and improvement of literature and the encouragement

of the learned natives of India, and for the introduction and promotion of knowledge of the

sciences among the British territories in India.2

1 Ambedkar B. R. in Moon Vasant (ed.), (1979), Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Writings and Speeches,

Vol. 1, Education Department, Govt. of Maharashtra, Mumbai, p. 47.

2 Ghosh S. C., (2013), The History of Education in Modern India1757-2012, Orient Black Swan

fourth edition, Hyderabad, p. 18.





Lord Macaulay, a Law member of Council of Governor General Lord William

Bentinck, had advocated the western education and English medium for education in India.3

The British occupation of Maharashtra marked a new era in the history of Maharashtra.

Elphinstone introduced modern education, which is very important in the history of modern

Maharashtra, because it brought many important modern ideas, responsible for bringing

social change. It is an important aspect of social history of modern Maharashtra. The English

Education was introduced due to the need of new rulers to educate local people to conduct

day to day administration. Mountstuart Elphinstone considered the caste system and the

feudal structure of Indian society was essential to maintain good relations between the rulers

and the ruled. It is evident from the histories of various colonized societies that the

colonizers, instead of destroying the earlier feudal structure, nurtured the process of

formation of new classes, which were to co-exist alongside the feudal structure and be the

mediators between themselves and the ruled4. Thus he adopted a policy of appeasement of

the traditional caste-elite. He was fully aware about the fact that the Brahmins were not

willing to educate rest of the people due to fear of losing all kinds of privileges and

dominance over the society. So he attempted to put lower castes and untouchables away from

education and it was confined mostly to the Brahmins, though theoretically it was made open

to all irrespective of caste, gender etc. under the influence of liberal thoughts. For the purpose

of appeasement of the Brahmin elites, the „downward filtration‟ theory was suggested by the

government, which was based on the assumption that government should impart education

among the selected Brahmin elites; subsequently, they would impart it to the masses. In fact

the British Government was not willing to spread this English education among the masses

that means the Bahujan Samaj or low Caste Hindus. Rather than they were willing to execute

this Education to Brahmins only and it is very clear from the role of Elphinstone the first

Governor of the Bombay presidency.5 This view had come in the minds of the British think

tank with the fear of any revolt by the low caste people if they were given liberal western

education.6

3 Rai B. C., (1986), History of Indian Education, Prakashan Kendra, Lucknow, p. 106.

4 Chavan Dilip, (2013), Language Politics under Colonialism: Caste, Class and Language Pedagogy

in Western India, Cambridge Scholars Publishing, U. K. p. 3.

5 Bhole B. L., (2009), Mahatma Jyotirao Phule Warsa Ani Wasa, Saket Prakashan, Pune, fourth

edition, p. 112.

6 Ibid, p. 114.




The Woods Dispatch came in 1854 and it threw out the Downward Filtration Theory

and advocated government to take responsibility of educating the low caste poor people. That

is why it was considered as the “Charter of English Education for Indians”. Though it was not

accepted on the ground level, it was really welcomed in the Indian scenario. But the

Downward Filtration theory was in practice even up to the last decade of Nineteenth century.

Mahatma Jotirao Phule always objected this theory and demanded to educate common

people. The Wood‟s Dispatch had strongly recommended establishment of the universities in

the presidency cities and so in January 1857, Lord Canning, Dalhousie‟s successor, passed

the Acts of Incorporation which provided for the establishment of the universities in Calcutta,

Bombay and Madras .7 This was very useful step to spread education among masses. It

helped a lot in bringing social awareness in India.

Mahatma Jyotirao Phule, born in Shudra caste (Mali), is regarded as the pioneer of

revolutionary social reforms in Maharashtra. He realized the exploitative, discriminatory,

caste-patriarchal nature of the Hindu society, He strongly believed that the worst socio-

economic and political condition of the Shudras (Lower castes), Atishudras

(Dalits/Untouchables) and Women was the result of ban on education to them and he

condemned the Brahmins for that.

Mahatma Phule believed in the ability of education in bringing about social change

because the most important feature of humanity is his power of thinking and knowledge. He

thought that there would be an overall revolution in India just like in western countries only

by imparting education to all.8 He realized the fact that the rejection of education to rest of

the society is a decisive move by the Brahmanical system to exercise control and exploitation

of the masses through the Caste system. The women, Shudras and Dalits were totally

ignorant of their slavery only because of denial of education to them. Therefore their

exploitation by the upper castes had become so easy and simple process. Lack of education

and knowledge, as a result of the caste system, did not allow them to think about any kind of

human rights or they remained far away from the concept of human rights. By knowing the

root cause of the inequality and exploitation of the masses, Mahatma Phule began to attack

the inequality in the field of education, which is a nature of Caste system and dedicated his

7 Ghosh S. C., (2013), The History of Education in Modern India, 1757-2012, Orient Black Swan,

fourth edition, Hyderabad, p. 85.

8 Bagade Umesh, (2010), Mahatma Jyotirao Phule, Gandharva Ved Prakashan, Pune, p. 41.




whole life to bring about society based on equality, liberty, fraternity and justice by imparting

education to all.9

Mahatma Phule‟s concept of Education was for liberation by nature; the education

must bring about the liberation of the depressed strata of the society. These people should

know their real history so as to understand the decisiveness of the Brahmanical system.

According to him, only by getting proper education and the knowledge of the past the

women, shudras and dalits will came to know how they were cheated and exploited by the

system, and they will be able to launch a strong and meaningful struggle against the caste

system and its impact on the society.

Mahatma Phule himself with his wife, Savitribai, opened the schools for girls and

dalits to make them aware of their slavery, which was a result of the caste system. He

founded the Satyashodhak Samaj (Truth Seeking Society), for creating awareness among the

Shudras and Atishudras and fought against all kinds of injustice and devoted for the creation

of a just society based on the principles of modern concepts. He desired radical social

changes in the society by restructuring and reorganizing it on the modern human concepts.

Though his revolutionary thoughts were not properly understood even by his followers, and

ignored by the elite high caste Hindus, his struggle for justice and equality was the landmark

in the social history of modern India.

Mahatma Jyotiba Phule had come forward as a first voice for the education of the

women and dalits. He strongly opposed the Downward Filtration Theory on the basis of the

reality. Reality was that even one Dalit student if he came in the class he was given such

worst treatment that he had no way than to leave school. Mahatma Phule had the clear idea

that within the society which is divided into many castes it is very natural that high castes

were thinking of their progress only and could not think about spreading education among the

dalits and women. To him, social slavery is most dangerous evil than political slavery. This

social slavery had come only because of the divisible caste system in Hindu society, so he

wanted it to eradicate by educating women Shudras and dalits on the western line. According

to him social change is not possible without educating the oppressed people. Only educated

Brahmins will never eradicate this social evil of caste system, which is very beneficiary to

them. And so Mahatma Phule strongly attacked the Downward Filtration theory, he rather

wanted to attack the basic values of caste system with forming strong union of women,

9 Ibid, p. 41.




shudras and dalits, because the society was completely under influence of caste values which

were prevalent since last thousands of years among them.

He not only appealed the government to spread education among these downtrodden

people but also himself started schools for women and Mahar-Mangs, which are from

untouchable castes. With the help of western education, he wanted to make the untouchables

and women aware of their conditions which would be challengeable by launching a strong

struggle against the caste system by forming strong organizations. He started the first school

for the oppressed girls in Bhidewada at Pune in 1848. 10

This was an act of violation of social

rules and so his father expelled him from his house. But Mahatma Phule didn‟t look back and

again opened new three schools for girls in 1851and 1852 in Pune only. During this period of

5-6 years, he started three schools for untouchables like Mahars, Mangs etc.11

Actually he

wanted to wake up this oppressed castes against the basic reason of their oppression by

educating them with new western ideas like equality, humanism, freedom, brotherhood etc.

He strongly recommended the British government to spend the money collected from the

common people through the various taxes on them instead of spending on the upper caste‟s

education, which resulted in maintaining age-old slavery of shudra, atishudras and women

due to the lack of education.12

Even other social reformers like Lokhitwadi, Ranade, Agarkar,

etc. were also well-known about the fact that Brahmins had deprived rest of the society with

denying the right to education to them. Lokhitwadi said:

“The Brahmins have monopolized learning through unfair means. They have decreed

that other castes should not be educated. Today the Brahmins have captured all the

means of livelihood. The Brahmin Pandits have threatened to leave their profession

rather than teach the holy language Sanskrit to non-Brahmin students.”13

Mahatma Phule opined that only lack of education is responsible for the worst

condition of the women, Shudras and untouchables. He rightly stated that lack of knowledge,

for which he used the word “Avidya” in his famous quotation in Marathi, is responsible for

all kinds of injustice with the untouchables, women and Shudras. They even could not think

properly, they were totally lost their confidence. They were just behaving as directed by the

10

Keer Dhananjay, (2013), Mahatma Jyotirao Phule, Third edition, Popular Prakashan, Pune, p. 24.

11 Ibid, p. 149.

12 Ibid, p. 208-227.

13 Joshi Laxmanshastri, (2010), Jyotirao Phule, National Book Trust, New Delhi, reprint 2010, p. 12.




law books and this is the mental slavery given to them by the Hinduism and so Mahatma

Phule was against this Mental Slavery of the untouchables and women.

According to him, Knowledge and Education is essential for giving the humanity to

human being.14

He believed that just like the revolution took place in western countries due to

education, the same will happen in India and only with the help of imparting western

education to all.15

He believed that the knowledge and education are the keys to the social

revolution in India. He states that due to lack of knowledge, these people never revolted

against the system and accepted all kinds of injustice. So he was very keen and firm on

educating this Bahujan Samaj, i. e. non-Brahmins. He was quite sure that if the people from

lower classes were educated, they would be willing to struggle for basic human rights.16

He

was looking at education as a tool to help non-Brahmins in improving their livelihood.

He was almost very close to the views of Paulo Friary‟s theory of social revolution

through Education in “Pedagogy of the Oppressed” or “Cultural Action for Freedom.”17

He

wanted a strong revolt against the prevalent evil social system by the non-Brahmins so as to

make new society free from any kind of discrimination. He wanted education to play role of

creating new society with full of righteousness, equality, ethics etc. Nobody could be

deprived of human rights. No one should be oppressed by anyone. Thus humanity and social

equality were very essential thoughts of Mahatma Phule and he tried hard to bring these

values with the help of education.

14

Keer, Malshe (ed.), (op cit.), p. 256.

15 Mude Sham, Kasale Dipak, Jaybhaye Anil (Ed.), (2013), Shikshak Din, Hariti Publication, Pune, p.

152.

16 Joshi Laxmanshastri, op. cit., p. 15.

17 Bhole B. L., (2009), Mahatma Jyotirao Phule Warsa Ani Wasa, Saket Prakashan, Pune, fourth

edition, p. 121.




SURFACE TENSION OF BINARY MIXTURES OF WATER AND ALCOHOLS

BY USING JAEGER‟S METHOD

SUKDEO KISANRAO THORAT

Adv. M.N.Deshmukh College Rajur,

Tal-Akole, Dist-Ahmednagar (M.S.)

ABSTRACT : Surface tension of binary mixtures of water and alcohols was measured at

different temperatures by using the Jaeger‟s method. Surface tension values were correlated

with temperature and mole fraction of binary mixtures. The surface tension of these binary

mixtures decreases with the increase in alcohol content in water. Surface tensions for

methanol, ethanol , 1-propanol and 2- propanol were determined at various temperatures

and normal atmospheric pressure. The magnitude of these experimental quantities is

discussed in terms of the nature and type of intermolecular force of attraction and hydrogen

bonding in the binary mixtures.

Key words: surface tension, Jaeger‟s method, binary mixtures, temperature, mole fraction.

INTRODUCTION

Surface tension is most important property of any liquid. The study of the mechanical

properties of liquid mixtures containing water and alcohols is an interested task. Moreover,

the analysis of properties, such as, surface tension, is very important from a theoretical point

of view. The surface tension of liquid mixtures has been investigated by several researchers

There are numerous applications in engineering sciences with the mixtures of water and

alcohols. Tension caused in surface of liquids by the polarity of water and alcohol, self-

association and cross-association between water and alcohol are visible. These features have

a significant impact on physical and chemical properties of such mixtures. Calculating the

surface and interfacial tension of liquid mixtures is very important, because these properties

play an important role in interfacial heat and mass transfer. It also contains information on the

structure and energy of the surface region.

To study surface tension property of mixtures, Jaegers method is used. The excess

pressure inside an air bubble in a liquid is 2T/r, where T is the surface tension of the liquid

and r is the radius of the bubble. This excess pressure is measured by Jaegers method. This

method having some important advantages such as the internal radius of the capillary tube is

to be determined at the aperture at its lower end, so there is no error due to non-uniformity in




the bore of tube. As a fresh bubble is formed every time, the liquid-air surface is

automatically being renewed, thereby greatly reducing possibility of error due to

contamination of the surface. In this method to measure the surface tension of given liquid,

the angle of contact between the liquid- solid surfaces is not required. The small quantity of

liquid is required.

There is no absolute certainty that the radius of bubble, when it is detached from the

tube is same as the radius of aperture at the lower end and it may not be hemispherical. For a

greater accuracy in the result, formula is modified.

MATERIALS AND METHOD

The surface tension is measured by using Jaegers method. The radius of 10 cm long

capillary tube is measured by using two motion travelling microscope. The radius of capillary

tube is 0.05 cm measured. The capillary tube is dipped into the experimental liquid about 4

cm of its length. The vessel containing the experimental liquid has diameter about 8 cm so

that the liquid surface is flat. The liquid used in manometer tube of Jaeger‟s apparatus has

lower density so that the difference of level in the two limbs will be large. To vary the

temperature of experimental liquid the constant temperature water bath is used around the

vessel containing experimental liquid. Thermometer is inserted in experimental liquid to

measure the temperature. The difference in limbs of manometer is recorded for water, and

alcohol mixture at various temperature. Standard experimental procedure of Jaeger‟s method

for determination of surface tension of liquid is used. It was found that the measurement of

difference in limbs of manometer tube is crucial one. By using appropriate formula, surface

tension is calculated.

Liquid Company Purity % Density (d) gm/cc Surface Tension

(T) dyne/cm

Methanol Merck 99.99 0.7915 22.45

Ethanol Merck 99.99 0.7894 22.39

1-Propanol Merck 99.99 0.8035 23.70

2-Propanol Merck 99.99 0.7801 21.70

Table 1: Liquid , purity, density and surface tension

Temperature

(deg Celsius)

Surface

Tension (T)

(dyne/cm)

Surface tension

(T) Reference.

(dyne/cm)

Measured difference in

Manometer levels

(cm)




20 72.75 72.75 2.95

30 71.35 71.20 2.90

40 69.40 69.68 2.80

50 67.87 67.94 2.75

60 66.50 66.24 2.70

70 64.58 64.47 2.60

80 63.20 62.67 2.55

90 61.25 60.80 2.50

Table 2 : Experimental temperature, difference in manometer levels and

surface tensions for water.

Temperature

(deg Celsius)

Surface

Tension (T)

(dyne/cm)

Surface tension

(T) Reference.

(dyne/cm)


Manometer levels

(cm)

20 22.65 22.63 0.95

30 21.55 21.48 0.90

40 20.80 20.78 0.85

50 19.89 19.97 0.80

60 19.6 19.51 0.75


surface tensions for methanol

Temperature

(deg Celsius)

Surface

Tension (T)

(dyne/cm)

Surface tension

(T) Reference.

(dyne/cm)


Manometer levels

(cm)

20 22.57 22.57 0.95

30 21.71 21.72 0.90

40 20.89 20.89 0.85

50 19.75 19.76 0.80

60 19.18 19.18 0.75

70 18.35 18.34 0.70


surface tensions for Ethanol

Temperature

(deg Celsius)

Surface

Tension (T)

Surface tension

(T) Reference.


Manometer levels




(dyne/cm) (dyne/cm) (cm)

20 23.55 23.55 1

30 23.11 23.11 0.95

40 21.96 21.97 0.9

50 21.55 21.55 0.85

60 20.73 20.73 0.80

70 19.70 19.71 0.75

80 19.18 19.18 0.70


surface tensions for 1-propanol.

Temperature

(deg Celsius)

Surface

Tension (T)

(dyne/cm)

Surface tension

(T) Reference.

(dyne/cm)


Manometer levels

(cm)

20 21.15 21.16 0.90

30 20.38 20.35 0.85

40 19.59 19.56 0.80

50 18.87 18.83 0.75

60 18.35 18.32 0.70

70 17.48 17.49 0.65

80 16.74 16.70 0.60

Table 6 : Experimental temperature , difference in manometer levels and

surface tensions for 2-Propanol.

RESULT AND DISCUSSION

The experimental results shows that there is a non-linear decrease in surface tension

with the addition of alcohols. The surface tension of water and alcohols were correlated with

the temperature, and it shows that surface tension is influenced by the temperature. Surface

tension decreases with increase in temperature. In the dilute alcohol, the hydrophobic

hydration induces a respective surface. The surface tension decreases with the mole fraction

of alcohol. The force of attraction between water molecules is greater than between alcohol

molecules and water molecules. Therefore water molecules have tendency to move inside and

alcohol molecules comes to the surface. After formation of monolayer, the solute molecules

,on the surface and in alcohol become tightest. The given solution loses its original nature as




there is aggregation of molecules. The surface area decreases as the molecular interaction in

alcohol become weak and due to aggregations, hydrogen bonding in water is destroyed .The

experimental study and measurement of surface tension of mixture of water and alcohol is a

easy task by Jaeger‟s method than that of other methods.

REFERENCES

1) H. Ghahremani ,A. Moradi ,J. Abedini-Torghabeh ,S.M. Hassani ,Measuring surface

tension of binary mixtures of water + alcohols from the diffraction pattern of surface

ripples, (Pelagia Research Library, 2011).

2) H.T. Davis, Statistical mechanism of phases interfaces, and thin films, (Wiley-VCH,

1995).

3) J. Lyklema, Fundamentals of interface and colloid science: liquid-fluid interfaces,

(Academic press, London, 2000) .

4) R. Defay, I. Prigogine, A. Bellemans, D.H. Everett, Surface tension and adsorption (John

Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 1966) .

5) T.K. Barik, P.R. Chaudhuri, A. Roy, S. Kar, (IOP Journal, 2006).




POSITION AND ROLE OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE IN INDIA

BHUVANCHAND TIWARI


Department of English, DGM‟s Hon. B. J. A. C. College, Ale,

Tal: Junnar, Dist: Pune 412411, MS, India

Phone: +91 9011464474, E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract : The present work aims to provide a detailed account of the evolution of language

form strategies of language teaching. The Teaching Learning process is a dynamic process

and it keeps changing as the civilization demands. The teachers keep reforming and

reapplying their knowledge in order to keep abreast with the changing techniques. India is the

fastest growing economy in the world and nation is at an advanced level in the minds of the

people of other countries. In recent scenario, India has made and showed its importance to

other countries all over the world and day by day its quality of importance is increasing. The

most important thing is its education and effective use of English, which has become a global

language today. Globalization is the new buzzword. The need of the day is to spread English

Language all over India. English is not only a global language but a language of

opportunities. The training of English Teachers in ELT becomes very important. It means to

improve teaching of English in changed conditions of today. The problems related to

methods, approaches, reading, writing, listening and speaking skills, teaching of prose, poetry

and grammar, testing and evaluation systems, policy matters, teaching- learning environment,

teaching aids, reading material, infrastructural facilities, etc. have been discussed in the

background of present situation which describe the position and role of English Language in

India.

INTRODUCTION

English has an access to significant magnitude of Knowledge. Today‟s technological

advancements and the rise of the internet access to huge amounts of knowledge on just about

any subject. We truly live in an age of information; however, most of the knowledge

available is written in English. Most of the websites on the Web are in English, many books

are written in English, most of press and news reports are in English. Many people believe

the English language to be the language of communication worldwide. There are billion





peoples across the world who speaks and working on learning the language right now.

International Politicians are uses English language for conferences.

In India, English is not less important language for Indian speakers.

In terms of numbers of English speakers, the Indian subcontinent ranks third in the

world, after the USA and UK. An estimated 4% of the Indian population uses English;

although the number might seem small, out of the total population that is about 35 million

people.

English is used in both public and personal domains and its functions "extend far

beyond those normally associated with an outside language, including the instrumental, the

regulative, the interpersonal and the innovative, self-expressive function".2 English is not

classified as one of the 15 national languages of India. Although Hindi is the Official

Language of the Union, provision was made in the Constitution that English would be used in

official work until 1965, after which Hindi would replace it. Because of the opposition of the

Dravidian south against Hindi, the Indian Government decided to further extend the role of

English as an additional language with Hindi to be used for purposes of the Union and in

Parliament (The Official Language Act 1967). English is now recognized as an associate

official language, with Hindi, the official language. It is recognized as the official language in

four states (Manipur, Meghalaya, Nagaland, and Tripura) and in eight Union territories

(including Delhi).3 Various political and nationalistic pressures continue to push for the

choice of Hindi as a national language. However, it is hard to remove English from its place

as a language of wider communication, lingua franca, especially among the educated elite, or

to replace the regional languages in mass communication by Hindi. English plays a dominant

role in the media; it has been used as a medium for inter-state communication, the pan-Indian

press and broadcasting both before and since India's independence. The impact of English is

not only continuing but increasing. As per the data from the Annual statements received, the

highest number of newspapers were published in Hindi (7910), followed by English (1406).4

Due to deep social penetration and the extended range of functions of English in

diverse sociolinguistic contexts there are several varieties, localized registers and genres for

articulating local, social, cultural and religious identity. It is proved that South Asian varieties

of English are being nativized by acquiring new identities in new socio-cultural contexts.

South Asian English has developed to a more distinctive level than in other countries where

English is used as a second language. English in India has evolved characteristic features at

the phonological, lexical, syntactic and even at discourse level. Initially, these innovations

were rejected by purists, but they are becoming increasingly accepted. English is not anymore




treated as a foreign language; it is part of the cultural identity of India. Indians in their use of

English have always been restrained in comparison to Americans.5

The variation manifested in the use of English as an international language should be

subsumed within the concept of "Standard English", and the divergent forms should be

recognized as standard practice or styles of Standard English; styles of speech or expression

to which speakers of English as an international language will be exposed, and which will

constitute their repertoire.

POSITION AND ROLE OF ENGLISH IN INDIA

English through a foreign language has always occupied a unique position in the

educational system in India. Despite of the fact that it received a great setback after

independence, it continues to be a major language having a prestigious position in our

society. After independence, it received a hostile treatment not only at the hands of our

political leaders but also some eminent scholars. Mahatma Gandhi opposed educating the

Indians in English because it deprived them to of their national respect and resulted in slavish

behavior.6

There were however, some people who advocated the urge of English for oblivious

reason. English had been the medium of instruction, the language of administration and law;

and the main vehicle of communicate with the rulers. Its abolition, therefore, would have had

an advance effect on education and governmental administration. Maulana Azad and C.

Rajagopalachari both realized that abolition of English would be a great setback to the cause

of Education in India. Pt. Nehru also voiced these fears when he said that English acted as the

major window for the Indians to the world and its closure would spell peril for our future. It

was 1950 when the language controversy got intense. With the commencement of our

Constitution, on 26 Jan 1950, it were unanimously decided that English should continue as

the official language for fifteen years.7 Article 343 (Clause 2) of the constitution stated:

For a period of 15 years from the commencement of the constitution the English

language shall continue to be used for all purposes of the Union for which it was being used

before such commencement.

The specification of fifteen years was crucial for developing Hindi as a substitute for

English; it was believed that after this period both the states and center would be able to

dispense with English for good. But the imposition of Hindi on Non- Hindi states,

particularly Madras and West Bengal, resulted in clashes in these states. They argued that the




removal of English would mean isolation from the main current of the knowledge of science

and technology8. The official languages Commission‟s Report stated in 1955.

English is one of the foremost languages in the world today. In international bodies

and conferences English has in the last ten years shot ahead of the languages. English is

unquestionably the foremost medium of international communication…We in India happen

to have already a considerable measure of linguistic competence in English language

developed over the period of a couple of centuries of British rule and it would be want only

foolish to throw away this language.

The commission realized the unique position that English occupied here. In the same

report, it was argued that English could be used as a second language for specific purposes

„for the appropriate personnel.‟ Although Hindi became the national Language in India and

efforts began to be made for its development, doing away with English seemed an uphill task.

On the one hand, there were non-Hindi areas objecting to the imposition of Hindi, on the

other hand, there were some psychological reasons that made its adoptions a very difficult

task. Dr. Sunil Kumar Chatterjee, one of the members on the official language commission,

wrote his dissenting note on selecting Hindi out of 14 main languages, as enumerated in the

8th Schedule of the constitution. He opined that the situation has changed since passing of the

constitution and large sections of people, especially in the West Bengal, Bombay and Madras,

would like to keep English as the official language of India. Another member on the

commission remarked that acceptance of Hindi in Constitution was done in haste and the

people in non-Hindi areas were being forced to adopt it. It is interesting to know that the

various commissions and committees appointed from time to time by government of India

could not agree on the single formula regarding the teaching and learning of English, Hindi or

any other regional language. The Tara Chand committee of 1948 recommended that the

regional languages should replace English as the media of instruction. The secondary

education commission of 1953 suggested that the mother should be medium of instruction at

the school level and English along with Hindi also be studied. The official languages

commission highlighted the importance of Hindi as the official language. The Central

Advisory Board of Education 1956 and Chief Minister‟s conference of 1961 devised and

recommended the three language formula. However, the Kothari Commission of 1966

suggested that English should continue as the medium of instruction but at the same time

stressed to the importance of other world languages, especially Russian. The fact of the

matter is that English continues to occupy a unique position in India not only at the school

level but also higher education. After the formation of Maharashtra, the state has focused




toward industrial development. The main focus of government is toward developing tourism

and hospitality as an emerging tool to penetrate the rural poverty in the state. To promote the

image of Maharashtra state need to advertise the state on national and international platforms

which is only possible through spread of English among skilled persons of this sector.

NCERT has started to modify the books to increase the effectiveness of reading materials.

Short history of English teaching in India begins with the arrival of the East India

Company instituted by British. With the coming of the British, English came to India.

English was the language of rulers and, for this reason, become the language of those who

wanted to try to be equal with masters socially and professionally. During earliest period

(1765-1813), the British rulers never thought of teaching English to Indians because were

frightened of teaching their language as they had lost colonies in America by giving English

education. However, the situation began to differ after the battle of Plassey. As the traders

decided to establish educational institutions so that they could win over the people whom

they had started to rule. They opened institutions of classical learning, namely Calcutta,

Madras (1781) and Banaras Sanskrit College (1791).

CONCLUSION

Maharashtra state has emerged as planning well to reform Teaching English. As the

state is recently constituted so it will take time to implement the planning. Despite of various

hurdles state governments have always tried to keep emphasis over education enrichment by

considering few suggestions as

1) Introduction to E-classes.

2) Modification of best teacher module.

3) Training programs such as Rashtriya Shiksha Abhiyan.

4) Training through Video conferencing.

5) Training to Coordinators and Mentors in the use of ICT for teaching learning process in

education.

6) Counseling and consultation services.

7) Development of website for books analysis and providing various complementary

resources.

REFERENCES

1) A.S. Diamond, “The History and origin of Language (London, 1959).




2) Bhadanri, Supriya. “Problems of Teaching English at College Level in India” –

Boloji.com (24th may 2010).

3) Bright, J.A. and Mc Gregor G.P. (1970): Teaching English as a Second Language.

4) Crystal, D., 2003. English as a Global Language. London: Longman.

5) Cameron, L., 2005. Teaching Languages to Young Learners. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge

University Press.

6) Freeman D. (2007) Techniques and Principles in Language Teaching, Oxford University

Press, New Delhi

7) Freeman D. Richards J. (1993) Conceptions of Teaching and the Education of Second

Language Teachers, TESOL, Quarterly 27/2

8) www.hubpages.com -Writes, J Devis. “Teaching ESL: 10 Common problem in

classroom”.




TRIBAL AREAS SCOCIAL IMAPCT OF DIMBHE DAM IN THE SUBMERGED

AREA OF THE AMBEGAON TAHSIL, DIST-PUNE

DR. VILAS RAMCHANDRA UGALE

Sir Parshurambhau College,

Tilak Road, Pune-411 030

Abstract : The dams have been constructed for betterment of Human life. Infect it is the usual

way of conservation of water. Geographically, it is diversion of water resource for

agriculture from one area to other. This affects livelihood to the tribal people living in the

source region mainly due to displacement of natural resources like land, soil, biomass and

water. The present paper attempts to analyses how construction of a dam can cause ill effects

on the villagers in the submerged area of Dimbhe dam located at Dimbhe Bk., Tahsil.

Ambegaon, Dist. Pune, Maharashtra. The paper observes that the negative impact of the dam

has been severe threatening the livelihood of tribal people. The parameters like growth of

population, Sex-ratio, Proportion of working population, etc. have been used to understand

the impact on the basis of secondary data. In addition to this, a field survey has also been

conducted to know the perception of local people. The study concludes that by giving

alternate land resource to the affected family cannot compensate the loss of resource base of

the villages majority of them come from the tribal communities.

INTRODUCTION

Construction of major, medium and minor irrigation projects has been considered as

the programme for improvement of agricultural sector and thereby achieving rural

development. However, the problems of submerged area due to construction of dam have not

been resolved properly since pre-independence. A geographical analysis may be useful to

understand the facts and factors affecting the livelihood of the project affected people. With

this view in mind a geographical study has been carried out to understand to what extent the

project can cause threat to the livelihood of the families who have lost their resource base. It

is true and well accepted notion that dams provide regulation of water resource in a

controlled manner in such a way that the agricultural output and employment in the rural

sector can be improved significantly. However, this may create poverty in the submerged

areas. The present study has selected the Dimbhe dam, submerged villages of which, belong




to the tribal communities. The study has adopted a micro-level approach and based on both

secondary and primary data.

THE STUDY AREA

The Ambegaon Tahsil is the latitudinal extent of Ambegaon tahsil is from 18º 51‟

10‟‟ to 19º 13‟ 45‟‟ N and longitudinal extent is from 73º 30‟ 40‟‟ E to 74º 10‟ 15‟‟ E. The

study area for the present work has been selected as the submerged area of the Dimbhe dam

tahsil Ambegaon, Dist Pune, Maharashtra. There are about 24 villages showing 20 to 100 %

NSA (Net Shown Area) submerged due to backwater of the dam (Fig.No.1 and 2). These

villages constitute the population of 14219 according to the 2001 census. All the villages

under study has been classified as tribal villages and more than 95 % of population has been

tribal. Thus, the community in question represents poorest of poor and hence selected for the

study.

LOCATION MAP OF THE STUDY

AREA

Fig. No. 1.2




HYPOTHESIS

The present study hypothesis that the construction of the dam, it has put forth a threat

to the livelihood of the poor society and hence negatively affected on sustainable

development.

OBJECTIVES

The present paper has main objective to find out to what extent the displacement of

resources has affected the livelihood of local communities. The study has also attempted to

find out ways and means to resolve such problems.

METHODOLOGY

The study begins with identifying the submerged villages using contour map and

village boundary map. The secondary sources like government records have provided data

regarding village-wise number of affected families, Proportion of NSA submerged due to

dam and number of families receiving alternative land. For indepth understanding the study

has adopted parametric approach and decadal change from 1991 to 2001 has been considered

as the effect of dam which has been made by carrying out field survey of 50 families from the

randomly selected 5 villages. The suggestions made in the paper have been based on the

primary survey and discussions with key persons.




THE TECHNIQUES

The GIS technique has been used to mark the submerged area using layers

representing contours, drainage and village boundaries. Simple statistical techniques like

percentage, decadal growth of population etc. have been employed.

IMPACT OF CONSTRUCTION OF THE DAM

The construction of Dimbhe Dam has certainly the positive impact especially in the

villages receiving canal water. There is negative impact of the dam in 24 villages due to

submerged area. The study has attempted to understand the problems of community in the

submerged villages due to construction of the dam. According to the data collected from the

Irrigation Department there is loss of 1887.22 hectares of agricultural land due to

submergence. Villagewise distribution of submerged area has been tabulated (Table No. 1)

and shown with the help of the map (Fig. No. 1).




Table No. 1

Villagewise submerged area

Village

Co. No. Name of Village

NSA

(hect.)

Subm-

erged

(hect.)

The area

allotted to

affected

families

Receivin

g

alternati

ve land

% to

subm-

erged

area to

NSA

9 Adivare 118 3.84 15 7.24 3.25

10 Borghar 1734 39.65 52 77.91 2.29

12 Panchale Bk. 140 33.39 45 77.11 23.85

13 Panchale Kh. 348 44.49 45 44.49 12.78

15 Amade 184 2.6 11 7.77 1.41

16 Nanavade 638 4.58 13 3.61 0.72

18 Patan 493 2.52 7 4.9 0.51

19 Mahalunge Tarf

Ambegaon 66 13.11 20 21.59 19.86

20 Kushire Bk. 327 44.78 58 52.55 13.69

21 Kushire Kh. 348 33.19 52 63.8 9.54

22 Digad 241 59.76 33 38.09 24.80

23 Vachape 461 276.96 146 215.65 60.08

24 Ambegaon 437.1 280.05 134 252.36 64.07

25 Phulvade 1656.22 392.67 174 255.73 23.71

27 Dimbhe Bk. 335.06 164.49 76 86.73 49.09

28 Koltavade 416 212.04 104 164.45 50.97

29 Kalambai 363 119.94 80 122.94 33.04

30 Jambhori 1649 11.82 14 17.25 0.72

32 Magholi 171 48.94 18 19.85 28.62

33 Savarli 329 28.7 40 30.55 8.72

34 Sakeri 1245 21.32 14 3.96 1.71

38 Pimpari 612 23.19 31 12.82 3.79

41 Phalode 581 4.96 19 3.6 0.85

44 Pokhari 1075 20.23 53 25.88 1.88

13967.38 1887.22 1254 1610.83 439.95

Source: Tahsil office Ghodegaon 2006




It is observed that there are 9 villages showing more than 40 % area under water. This

means that more than 40 % agricultural resources have been lost in those villages. This is a

case of resource displacement. The table clearly shows that sizeable agricultural land has

been submerged. It can be assumed that the submerged land is the fertile riverine land, which

has been under water. This means that affected villages have lost the fertile soil cover and

farmers have no other alternative but to cultivate less fertile, thin soils along the slopes.

Furthermore, submergence of land has caused considerable loss of biomass resources. This

loss cannot be compensated by allotting them agricultural land in the down stream area.

Table No. 5.22

Project affected families

Village

Co. No.

Name of

Village

Number

of

affected

families

Number of

families

receving

alternative

land

%

Number of

families

not

alternative

land

%

9 Adivare 15 6 40.00 9 60.00

10 Borghar 52 51 98.08 1 1.92

12 Panchale Bk. 45 41 91.11 4 8.89

13 Panchale Kh. 45 39 86.67 6 13.33

15 Amade 11 4 36.36 7 63.64

16 Nanavade 13 4 30.77 9 69.23

18 Patan 7 3 42.86 4 57.14

19 Mahalunge Tarf

Ambegaon 20 14 70.00 6 30.00

20 Kushire Bk. 58 33 56.90 25 43.10

21 Kushire Kh. 52 51 98.08 1 1.92

22 Digad 33 30 90.91 3 9.09

23 Vachape 146 146 100.00 0 0.00

24 Ambegaon 134 127 94.78 7 5.22

25 Phulvade 174 172 98.85 2 1.15

27 Dimbhe Bk. 76 60 78.95 16 21.05

28 Koltavade 104 104 100.00 0 0.00

29 Kalambai 80 78 97.50 2 2.50




30 Jambhori 14 12 85.71 2 14.29

32 Magholi 18 16 88.89 2 11.11

33 Savarli 40 29 72.50 1 2.50

34 Sakeri 14 3 21.43 11 78.57

38 Pimpari 31 9 29.03 18 58.06

41 Phalode 19 7 36.84 9 47.37

44 Pokhari 53 30 56.60 7 13.21

Total 1254 1069 1702.82 152 613.29

Source: Tahsil office Ghodegaon 2006

It is also observed that about 1254 families affected due to the project. However, 1069

families have got land as compensation. About 1887.22 heatares of agricultural land is

submerged and only 1600 hectares of land has been allotted to the affected farmers.

According to 2001 censes total number of families is 2432. This means that about 50 %

families have suffered due to the project (Table No. 3). This has created large scale

outmigration from tribal villages. This may be considered as displacement of human

resources although quality of the resource may not be very high.

Table No. 3

Impact of Dam on Population Growth

Village

Co. No. Name of Village

1991 2001 Decadal

Growth

rate

Popul

-ation

House

hold

Popul

ation

Hous

e hold

9 Adivare 339 68 369 82 8.85

10 Borghar 2222 437 2239 432 0.77

12 Panchale Bk. 292 54 289 66 -1.03

13 Panchale Kh. 187 35 164 37 -12.30

15 Amade 167 41 210 46 25.75

16 Nanavade 368 78 483 120 31.25

18 Patan 146 26 165 28 13.01

19 Mahalunge Tarf

Ambegaon 106 58 71 14 -33.02

20 Kushire Bk. 211 49 216 48 2.37

21 Kushire Kh. 324 68 329 69 1.54




22 Digad 179 36 100 25 -44.13

23 Vachape 596 101 172 41 -71.14

24 Ambegaon 702 153 129 27 -81.62

25 Phulvade 1637 295 1524 285 -6.90

27 Dimbhe Bk. 1705 285 941 184 -44.81

28 Koltavade 783 145 391 85 -50.06

29 Kalambai 304 62 22 7 -92.76

30 Jambhori 1645 293 1766 354 7.36

32 Magholi 193 28 112 21 -41.97

33 Savarli 76 17 200 38 163.16

34 Sakeri 162 35 93 17 -42.59

38 Pimpari 250 50 273 59 9.20

41 Phalode 311 264 370 76 18.97

44 Pokhari 1314 213 1532 271 16.59

Total 14219 2891 12160 2432 -0.14481

Source: Censes 2001

The major problem, which has been observed in the field survey, is that allotment of

land and shifting of affected families to new villages took three years after submergence of

land. This means that the farmers in the affected villages have lost their livelihood at least for

the two consecutive agricultural seasons. This is a severe problem for the community, which

is already living in poverty. There are about 12 % affected families, which have not got the

compensation even after 8 years since construction of the dam.

Table No. 4

Impact of Dam on working Population

Village

C.N. Village Name

1991 2001

Cl.

Wo.

Al.

Wo.

Mar.

Wo

Cl.

Wo.

Al.

Wo.

Mar.

Wo

9 Adivare 99.06 0.94 21.83 66.82 1.84 8.82

10 Borghar 99.72 0.28 1.67 92.61 2.32 0.07

12 Panchale Bk. 95.89 4.11 33.90 77.06 2.94 7.61

13 Panchale Kh. 100.00 0.00 30.48 96.30 0.00 0.00

15 Amade 100.00 0.00 6.59 90.65 4.67 9.32

16 Nanavade 100.00 0.00 48.37 92.76 1.72 0.00




18 Patan 100.00 0.00 8.90 100.00 0.00 2.13

19 Mahalunge Tarf

Ambegaon 95.65 4.35 15.09 97.14 0.00 20.45

20 Kushire Bk. 100.00 0.00 6.16 96.30 0.00 0.00

21 Kushire Kh. 100.00 0.00 7.72 96.37 1.04 5.85

22 Digad 98.81 1.19 12.85 94.29 0.00 0.00

23 Vachape 95.73 4.27 14.93 75.00 13.39 5.08

24 Ambegaon 97.56 2.44 16.52 20.83 0.00 0.00

25 Phulvade 99.39 0.61 14.23 77.24 10.13 16.11

27 Dimbhe Bk. 95.34 4.66 12.32 28.79 9.34 32.72

28 Koltavade 100.00 0.00 3.19 94.93 2.90 44.35

29 Kalambai 100.00 0.00 23.03 100.00 0.00 0.00

30 Jambhori 98.53 1.47 1.09 96.12 0.41 5.05

32 Magholi 100.00 0.00 16.06 93.94 3.03 5.71

33 Savarli 100.00 0.00 30.26 100.00 0.00 1.45

34 Sakeri 97.83 2.17 31.48 97.48 0.00 2.46

38 Pimpari 94.85 5.15 21.20 92.72 5.34 2.37

41 Phalode 98.16 1.84 0.00 92.89 5.33 9.27

44 Pokhari 97.07 2.93 0.99 90.78 0.12 1.95

Total 98.66 1.34 10.39 86.92 3.07 7.85

Source: Censes 2001

It may be worth seen that growth of population in the affected villages is negative

(Table No. 3). There are some villages, which show positive decadal growth of population.

These are Phalode (18.97 %), Pokhari (16.59 %), Nanavade (31.25 %), Amade (25.75 %),

Patan (13.01 %) and Adivare (8.85 %). These villages have low proportion of hectarge under

water. Secondly, these villages are situated on the margines of the backwater. Therefore,

some families have constructed their huts along the upper slope as revealed from the field

enquiry. There is exceptional case of village Savarli showing 163 % growth of population.

However, after visiting the village it is found that about 40 families shifted from the village

and about 38 remained in the village. This clearly shows that the population data for 1991

might have been wrong. Therefore, case of this village has been omitted for further

processing of data. It is observed that population growth rate of the group of villages is -15.44

%. It may be compared with decadal growth of population of the tahsil (+14.47 %), Tribal




zone (+9.83 %) and Non Tribal zone (+15.70 %). This is the problem created not by local

people but by extra-regional forces.

The Table No. 4 shows decadal change in cultivators, agricultural labourers and

marginal workers. It is observed that reduction in number of cultivators is very high. The

agricultural labourers have increased with sizable proportion in some villages like Pimpari

(5.34 %), Phalode (5.33 %), Dimbhe Bk. (9.34 %), Phulvde (10.13%) and Vachape (13.39

%). This shows that there is considerable decrease in landholders and increase in the number

of landless labourers.

Table No. 5

Impact of the Dam in sample villages

Sr.

No.

Name of

Village

Number

of families

surveyed

Number

of

affected

families

Number of

families who

have lost less

than 50 % of

the

agricultural

land

Number of

families who

have lost more

than 50 % of

the agricultural

land

9

Panchale

Bk. 10 9

3 6

10 Dimbhe Bk. 10 5 3 2

12 Phalode 10 3 1 2

13 Nanavade 10 2 0 2

15 Koltavade 10 3 9 2

Total 50 22 8 14

Percentage 44 36.36 63.64

Source: Field survey of 2005

Some of landholders became landless labourers because of the project. Such landless

labourers migrated to the irrigated villages or urban areas. The important fact that may be

noted here is that there is more than 50 % reduction in marginal workers. The villages like

Adivare (8.82 %), Panchale Bk. (7.61), Panchale Kh. (9.32 %), Patan (2.13 %), Vachape

(5.08 %), Magholi (5.71 %), Savarli (1.45 %) etc. have shown very high i.e. more than 50 %

reduction in marginal workers. This indicates that the problem of resource displacement has

been partially solved for the group of landholders only. The marginal workers who live below




poverty line can not get any compensation. Therefore they have to emigrate from their

original villages. It may be remarked here that construction of the dam has created problems

for the community and more severe for the marginal workers.

Table 6

Change in working class 1991 - 2001

Village

C.N.

Village

Name

1991 2001

Cultivat

ors

Agricu

ltural

worke

rs

Margin

al

Worker

s

Cultivat

ors

Agricult

ural

workers

Margi

nal

Worke

rs

25 Phulvade 99.39 0.61 14.23 77.24 10.13 16.11

27

Dimbhe

Bk. 95.34 4.66 12.32 28.79 9.34 32.72

28 Koltavade 100.00 0.00 3.19 94.93 2.90 44.35

29 Kalambai 100.00 0.00 23.03 100.00 0.00 0.00

30 Jambhori 98.53 1.47 1.09 96.12 0.41 5.05

32 Magholi 100.00 0.00 16.06 93.94 3.03 5.71

33 Savarli 100.00 0.00 30.26 100.00 0.00 1.45

34 Sakeri 97.83 2.17 31.48 97.48 0.00 2.46

38 Pimpari 94.85 5.15 21.20 92.72 5.34 2.37

41 Phalode 98.16 1.84 0.00 92.89 5.33 9.27

44 Pokhari 97.07 2.93 0.99 90.78 0.12 1.95

Total 98.66 1.34 10.39 86.92 3.07 7.85

Source: Censes 2001

It has been already mentioned that the field survey has been carried out for the present

study. There are five project-affected villages in the set of randomly selected 24 villages. It

has been observed that 44 % families surveyed in the villages have been affected by the

project (Table No. 5). Of these, 64 % present families has lost more than 50 % of their land

while 36 %, have less than 50 %. The economic status of these families has been observed to

be very poor.

The suggestions made by the local people can be worth noting. These are briefly

given below.




1. We have lost fertile piece of land under rice cultivation. This has posed problem of food

security.

2. We get the certificate of project-affected family but it is of no use. We demand

gainful employment in government sector at least for one person in the family.

3. We should get permission to take water from the dam for irrigation in summer season.

4. We were marginally dependent upon fish from the river. After construction of dam we

are not allowed to catch fish in the backwater. Instead, government gave contract of

fishing to outside people.

5. The outsiders are allowed to construct the hotels and use resources, which are

traditionally owned by us.

6. We are deprived of land resources due to construction of the dam In addition to this,

the forest area has been declared as sanctuary. This has made us deprived of biomass

resources. This has made our life more miserable.

7. Due to constructions of hotels and development of tourism we are facing the problems

of animal death due to plastic material accumulated in the stomach."

It may be suggested here that the local people should be allowed to catch fish from

backwater of the dam. They may be provided with small boat on loan. The environmental

degradation due to tourism must be checked by effective implementation of the norms of eco-

tourism. As local population is deprived of forest resources, the community is facing severe

problem of firewood and fodder. It is recommended that with the principle of the Joint Forest

Management (JFM) participatory programmes should be undertaken. Thus, it is observed that

construction of the dam has created problems to the community.

CONCLUSION

The problems associated with negative impact of the Dimbhe dam have also

been understood with the help of secondary as well as primary data. This exercise has

proved to be useful to have the idea regarding the problems of the community. Thus, it

may be stated that the hypothesis formulated in the beginning has been proved. The

remedial measure suggested in the study may resolve the problems and help to

maintain sustainable living of the poor section of the society.

REFERNCES

1) Ahmad Aijazuddin (1999): "Social Geography" Published by Prem Rawat forRawat

Publications 3 Na –20, Jawahar Nagar Jaipur 302 004 India p.p. 114-15.




2) Bande (2002): "Working plan for Ghod Project - Division Junnar”, 1981-82 to 2001-

2002, Volume – 1 (Part I and II), Aurangabad.

3) Bedi M. S., (1988): "Drinking Behaviour and Development in Tribal Areas," Himanshu

Publication, Udaipur p.p. 96.

4) Behera (2000): "Tribal Religion change and Continuity" Published by Amit Verm, New

Delhi 110002 p.p. 2., 100.,

5) Ghosh Tapashi (2003): "Socia-Religion of the Tribes of West Bengal," Changing Tribal

life, A Socio Philosophical Perspective, Published and Printed by Mittal A. K. New Delhi

110059. p.p. 75.

6) Gare G. M.. (1991): "Planning of the Tribal Areas: A Growth Center Approach", Tribal

Research Bulletin Vol. XXI. No. I, Editorial Publisher Kharosekar R. D. Pune 411001

p.p. 25.

7) Jain N. S. (1995): "Tribals and Co-operative An overview of Tribal Research Studies,"

An overview of Tribal Research Studies Editer Jain N. S. and Tribhuwan R. D. New

Delhi, p.p. 20-25.

8) Jain N. (1998): "Tribals in Maharashtra state: A Report," Tribal Situation in India Issues

in Development, Edited by Vidyut Joshi, Published by Prem Rawat Jaipur 302004, p.p.

97.

9) Jairth M. S. (1991) "Tribal Economy and Society Published by K.M. Rai Mittal, New

Delhi-11059 p.p. 28-29.

10) Knowled., Wareing J. (1990): "Economic And Social Geography" edition / Published

rupa Co. 7/16, Asari Road Daryaganj, New Delhi 110 002. p.p. 64-66

11) Khuspe T. S., Bajai S.S., Yadav. B.B. (1980): "Socio-economic and Socio-

Psychological Facets of Mahadeo Kolis of Maharashtra," Tribal Research Bulletin Vol.

III No. I. Edited Publisher Dr. G. M. Gare. Pune 411001. p.p. 19

12) Mahalati S., Chari V., Gulnar (1993): "Socio-Economic exploitation of tribal women,"

Tribal Research Bulletin, Editor Publisher, N.P. Bhanage. Vol-XV, No. I Pune 411001

p.p. 44 - 46.

13) Mohanty M. K., (1990): " Tribal Society Programmers Planning And Economic

Change," Published by Chugh Publications, Allohabad (India) p.p. 220-236.

14) Patel M. L. (1974): "Changing land Problems of Tribal India," Published by P.K. Sharma

Bhopal.

15) Radhakrishnan S. (1948): "Religion And Society Contemparary Indian Philosophy,"

Printed in great Britain. p.p. 13.




16) Rajora Suresh Chandra. (1987): "Social Structure and Tribal Elites" Published by

Himunshu Publications Udaipur (Rajasthan).

17) Sachchidanda (1967): "Socio-economic Aspects of Tribal Education", in Report of the

National Seminar on Tribal Education in India, New Delhi: NCERT. p.p. 31

18) Sirsalkar P. R. (1977): "Problems of Tribal Development in Maharashtra," Planning for

Tribal Development, Edited by Ranjit Gupta, Ankur Publishing house, New Delhi, p.p.

50-53.

19) Singh K. S., (1982): "Tribal Movements In India" Vol. I. Published by Ramesh Jain New

Delhi 11002. p.p. 19

20) Sirsalkar P. R. (1977): "Problems of Tribal Development in Maharashtra," Planning for

Tribal Development, Edited by Ranjit Gupta, Ankur Publishing house, New Delhi, p.p.

50-53.

21) Surama M. B. (1985): "Socio- Economic survey of Tribals in the Proposed M.A.D.A.

Pocket in Buldbana District," Tribal Research Bulleting, Vol. VII., No. II., Editor,

Publisher Dr. G. M. Gare. Pune 411001 p.p. 11.




TASAR CULTURE : A SUSTAINABLE LOW COST FARM FORESTRY FOR

POVERTY ALLEVIATION ENDEAVER FOR KOLHAPUR DISTRICT OF

WESTERN MAHARASHTRA

S. R. WAGH


New Arts, Commerce & Science College, Parner,

Tal. Parner, Dist. Ahmednagar, Pin-414 302, Maharashtra State, India.

E mail: [email protected] Cell: +91 9403190432.

ABSTRACT : Sericulture is an agro-based cottage industry provides opportunities of

employment to rural youths. Mulberry sericulture is well organized sector of small cottage

industry and supported mainly by government agencies involving the farmers. Non- mulberry

sericulture is practiced in certain traditional areas of the country but there is lot of scope to

explore the available forest resources to undertake tasar culture on large scale. This will not

only provide the alternative job opportunities but also help in conservation of forest

resources. Taking into account the crucial role of tasar culture an effort has been made to

popularize tasar sericulture in rural areas of Kolhapur district during 2014 to 2015.

The study involved assessment of tasar silkworm host plants from the forest area,

motivation amongst villagers to disseminate tasar culture and transfer of tasar technology.

After survey on the availability of tasar food plants from Kolhapur district, two sites were

selected for study and the rearing was made on Terminalia tomentosa, as they are

abundantly available. Workshop on the rearing of tasar silkworm was organized for

beneficiaries. We have received great response from the villagers for tasar culture. 10

beneficiaries were selected from each site for rearing of tasar silkworm. In successive two

years two experimental rearing‟s at Panhala and Ajara were carried out. In the first and

second rearing beneficiaries have harvested 5000 and 7500 cocoons respectively. From these

rearing average income of Rs. 4000/- was earned by the each beneficiary which stands to be

11 % of the annual income of the farmers. In the present work, an attempt was made to

present the different aspects involved in tasar sericulture for the development of forest and

rural people.

Key Words : Tasar culture, Sustainable Development, Rural area.





INTRODUCTION

Basically the sericulture is divided into two main categories that are mulberry

sericulture and non-mulberry sericulture. Non mulberry sericulture includes utilization of

wild sericigenous insects for the production silk either in semi domesticated condition or in

the natural conditions (Dewangan, 2013). Diversity of sericigenous insects deals with the silk

producing insects and their food plants (Srivastava et al., 2009). Several reports are available

on the on the variety of sericigenous insects and their potential as a rich source of natural silk

from the Indian subcontinent (Sinha & Sinha, 1994; Akai, 1998; Nayak et al., 2000; Srivastva

et al., 2009).

Non-mulberry sericulture plays a crucial role in the socio-economic upliftment with

employment generation. Non-mulberry sericulture of India consists of Indian tasar silkworm

(Antherea mylitta Drury), Oak tasar silkworm (Antheraea proylei J.), Muga silkworm

(Antheraea assamensis Ww) and Eri silkworm (Bhatia et al., 2010). Bhatia et al., (2010)

provided the list of commercially exploited sericigenous insects and their food plants. This

list includes the host plants of tasar silkworm in Maharashtra viz. Terminalia tomentosa,

Terminalia arjuna, Zizyphus jujuba, Lagerstroemia purviflora, Anogeissus latifolia and

Shorea robusta. Non-mulberry sericulture is largely practiced in the forest area of the country

with the help of tribals and rural people residing in the area. Bhatia et al., (2010) provided the

information about state wise forest area and distribution of sericultural flora. In Maharashtra,

the area under silkworm tropical tasar is 10.04 lakh hectors. Tasar culture is one of the

promising agro- forestry based cottage industry and is one of the potential sector of applied

biology. The establishment of tasar culture can be effective in alleviating poverty, generating

employment opportunities in the form of primary or secondary income sources

(Gangopadhyay, 2008). According to Ray et al., (2006), tasar culture generates sixty lakh

man-days of employment every year in rural areas of India.

Tasar silkworm feed on wide range of forest plants. It can be semi-domesticated or

can be reared in the natural conditions. The Kolhapur district has huge forest area which

includes large number of tasar food plants like Terminalia tomentosa, Terminalia arjuna,

Terminalia bellerica, Terminalia catappa Zizyphus jujuba and others. Considering this great

availability of natural resources and wild sericigenous insects, during the present

investigation an effort was made to disseminate the tasar culture technology in the Kolhapur

district for the development of rural people.




METHODOLOGY

The work was carried out in three phases during 2014 to 2015 in the Kolhapur district

of Western Maharashtra, India.

1. Selection of sites: The present investigation was carried out by selecting 2 sites from

Kolhapur district namely Ajara and Panhala due to the presence of large number of host

plants in the nearby forest area.

2. Selection of Beneficiaries: By adopting various extension communication methods such as

inter-personnel communication, organizing informal meeting and workshop and

discussion in all 125 beneficiaries were selected initially for the tasar culture.

3. Experimental Rearing of tasar: During the two successive years (2014-2015) as per need,

the rearing of late age larvae on host plant i. e. Terminalia tomentosa was carried out.


Selection of Beneficiaries

In all 125 beneficiaries from 2 sites i.e. Ajara and Panhala of Kolhapur district were

selected for tasar culture. The beneficiaries were trained in tasar culture by arranging

workshop on tasar technology. The training was given on handling of worms, disinfection

and late age raring. From them only 10 beneficiaries from each site were selected for tasar

culture. (Deka et. al.) (2015).

Experimental Rearing:

The experimental rearing was carried out in selected sites in Kolhapur district during

2014 to 2015. In both years planned rearing was conducted at Panhala and Ajara. On an

average 100 DFLs were provided to each beneficiary. Beneficiaries harvested 5000 and 7500

cocoons respectively. From these rearing average income of Rs. 4000/- was earned by the

each beneficiary which stands to be 11% the annual income of the farmers. Similar results

were noticed by Madhusudhan K.N. (2017).

Tasar Food Plants:

In order to conserve the diversity of sericigenous insects and improve the livelihood

of rural people residing in and around the forest areas, more concentrated efforts are needed

on the dissemination of tasar culture technology. The Central Silk Borad, Ministry of

Textiles, Govt. of India is continuously engaged in the dissemination of this technology

(Srivastva et al., 2009; Bhatia et al., 2010). Department of Biotechnology, University Grants

Commission, New Delhi had provided financial support for tree plantation to the department

of Zoology, Shivaji University, Kolhapur during the year 2008 to 2013. On the similar line




the Central silk board has made a trial on the conservation of seri-biodiversity and

improvement of tribal livelihood in the state of Chhatisgarh. Under this effort, a detailed

survey and multidisciplinary trials have been made to generate bivoltine tasar seed cocoons

through adopted tasar silkworm seed rearing of Antheraea mylitta D. particularly with the

tribal women self-help group. This study provides detailed information on performance of

tribal women‟s tasar silkworm seed rearing in Surguja, Chhattisgarh. In all, 423 women were

engaged in the tasar culture in the tribal area of Chhatisgarh. The income earned by per

family was Rs.3,198.00/- (Bhatia et al., 2010). Similar type of experiment was conduected by

Dewangan (2013) in Ghargoda tribal block of Raigarh district of Chattisgarh state and it

provide the alternative source of income and full fill the livelihood of the tribals.

CONCLUSION

The geographical area of Kolhapur district is rich in tasar silkworm food plants and

also has suitable climatic conditions for the tasar silkworm rearing. The results obtained from

the experimental rearing are encouraging and is viable on commercial basis if the

beneficiaries take regular rearing of tasar silkworm on their own by following all the standard

methodologies of tasar culture.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS:

The author is grateful to Prof. G. P. Bhawane, Department of Zoology Shivaji

University, Kolhapur for guidance and encouragement. The author is also thankful to the

Principal, New Arts, Commerce and Science College, Parner for providing the facilities.

REFERENCES

1. Akai, H. (1998). Global scenario of wild silk. 3rd International Conference on wild silk

moth. 11-14 Nov. 1998, Bhubneshwar, India

2. Chatterjee K.K., Chandra H., Gupta R. and Chakravorty D. (2007). Tasar culture -An

approach of social upliftment of forest dwellers of achanakmar amarkantak

biosphere Res. Procee. Workshop held at Trop. For. Res. Inst., Jabalpur on Research

needs for Achanakmar- Amarkantak Biosphere Reserve.

3. Dewangan S.K., Sahu, K.R. and Achari, K.V. (2011). Sericulture: A tool of ecosystem

checking through tribals. Journal of Environmental Research and Development Vol. 6

No. 1: 165-173.




4. Dewangan, S. K. (2013). Employment generation with sustainable development and

biodiversity through sericulture: A study of three tribe blocks of Raigarh, India. Journal

of Environmental Research and Development Vol. 8 No. 1: 175-182.

5. Gangopadhyay, D. (2008). Sericulture Industry in India – A Review. India, Science and

Technology: S&T for Rural India and Inclusive Growth.

6. Nayak, B.K., Dash, A.K. and Patro, K. B. G. (2000). Biodiversity conservation of wild

tasar silk moth Antheraea paphia L. of Simlipal biosphere reserve and strategy for its

economic utilization. Int. J. Wild Silkmoth Silk. 5: 367- 370.

7. Ray, S, Agarwala, K.K. and Babu, C.R. (2006). asar sericulture, an emerging discipline

for conservation and sustainable utilization of natural resources, The vision review

point. Pp 1-4.

8. Sohn K.W. (2003). Conservation status of sericulture germplasm resources in the

world -2. FAO of the UN, Rome. http:/www. fao. org/ DOCREP/ 005/ AD108E/

AD108E00. Html.

9. Sinha, S. S. and Sinha, A. K. (1994). Conservation strategies for important wild silkmoth

population of Antheraea mylitta Drury (Lepidoptera: Saturniidae). Int. J. Wild Silkmoth

Silk. 2: 159-162.

10. Srivastava, A. K., Kar, P.K., Sinha, R.B. and Prakash, N.B.V. (2009). Present status of

biodiversity of wild sericigenous insects in India and strategy for conservation.

Proceedings of National Workshop on Seri-Biodiversity Conservation, March 7-8,

CSGRC, Central Silk Board, Hosur, India. pp. 167-172.

11. Deka M., Gargi G., Kumar R., Yadav H. and Sahay A., (2015). Silkworm-food plant-

interaction: search for an alternate food plant for tasar silkworm (Antheraea mylitta

Drury) rearing, Int. J. of Industrial Entomology, Vol. 30 No. 2, Pp. 58 - 63.

12. Madhusudhan K.N., Laltlankimi, Moorthy S.M., (2017). Impact of varying different

abiotic factors on the survivability of tasar silkworm in outdoor rearing fields. , Journal of

Entomology and Zoology Studies; 5(6): 957-963




EFFICACY OF CERTAIN PLANT EXTRACTS AGAINST ACHAEA JANATA L.

AND SITOPHILUS ORYZAE L.

S. R. YANKANCHI

Department of Zoology, Shivaji University, Kolhapur- 416 004

Email : [email protected]

Abstract

The castor semilooper, A. janata and rice weevil, S. oryzae are the major insect pests

of agriculture and stored grains respectively and have developed resistance to synthetic

insecticides. Thus, laboratory experiments were conducted to determine the toxic and feeding

deterrent efficacy of Clerodendrum viscosum, Clerodendrum multiflorum and Clerodendrum

serratum leaf extracts against two insect pests. The results revealed that, the ethanol extracts

of C. viscosum and C. multiflorum were found to be toxic to A. janata while C. multiflorum

and C. serratum extracts showed highest effect on S. oryzae at highest concentration. In

addition, the C. viscosum and C. multiflorum extracts showed strong feeding deterrent

properties to both insects. Among the both insects, the S. oryzae adults showed more

resistance than A. janata larvae in almost all plant extracts. However, study on the

mechanism of action is presumed to reveal interesting observations on the mode of action of

these botanical insecticides on both insects.

Key words: Achaea janata, botanicals, insecticidal, feeding deterrent Sitophilus oryzae

Introduction

The castor semilooper, Achaea janata (Lepidoptera: Noctuidae) and the rice weevil,

Sitophilus oryzae (Coleoptera: Curculionidae) are major insect pests of pre and post harvest

agricultural commodities respectively. To successful control of these two insect pests at field

and storage conditions are mainly rely on the use of conventional insecticides. Although they

are effective, the repetitive use of synthetic insecticides leads to development of resistance in

insects (Dhingra, 1998; Benhalima et al., 2004). Concurrently, the conventional insecticides

cause stern residual pollution of the environment, toxicity to consumers and residues on

grains (Singh and Sharma, 2015). In order to avoid this type of chemicals to management of

insect pests, the use of eco-friendly natural products has been attracted the attention of

researchers (Sukumar et al., 1991). The botanical extracts and essential oils may be a

prosperous alternative to conventional insecticides for controlling the major agricultural and





stored grained insect pests because of their low mammalian toxicity (Isman, 2006; Isman and

Seffrin, 2014). The toxicity of plant leaf extracts to insect pests is persuaded by the chemical

composition which depends on the season, source and environmental conditions, time and

extraction method and plant part used (Akhtar et al., 2012; Jadhav et al., 2016).

The Clerodendrum genus plants are widely distributed in tropical and subtropical

regions of the world and have more than six hundred species. Among all, the majority of

species were used in indigenous system of medicine and pharmaceutical purpose (Roy et al.,

1996; Shrivastava and Patel, 2007; Yankanchi and Koli, 2010; Pol et al., 2014). In addition,

the Clerodendrum plant species various parts powders, extracts and essential oils were

evaluated for their insecticidal activities against a number of agricultural and stored grain

insect pests (Pereira and Gurudutt, 1990; Patil et al., 2006; Yankanchi, 2009; Yankanchi et

al., 2009; Jadhav et al., 2016; Devarshi et al., 2017). The phyto-chemical analysis were

studied of this genus certain plants in different parts and were found the phenols, steroids,

flavonoids and terpenes (Kanchanapoom et al., 2001; Pandey et al., 2005; Shrivastava and

Patel, 2007). However, there are no reports on insecticidal action of C. viscosum, C.

multiflorum and C. serratum leaf extracts on agricultural and stored grain pests thus the

present study was designed to evaluate the insecticidal and feeding deterrent activities against

A. janata and S. oryzae in laboratory conditions.

Materials and Methods

Insects: The Achaea janata third instar larvae and Sitophilus oryzae adults used in

this study were obtained form a laboratory colony maintained in the Department of Zoology,

Shivaji University, Kolhapur. The Achaea janata and Sitophilus oryzae culture has been

continuously maintained on castor leaves and whole wheat grains respectively at room

temperature of 27 ± 2°C, 65 ± 5% RH and natural photo period in the laboratory (Prasad et

al., 2008; Yankanchi, 2009).

Extraction of plant material: The plant of Clerodendrum viscosum, Clerodendrum

multiflorum and Clerodendrum serratum leaves were collected in foothills of Western Ghats

Kolhapur district vicinity and authenticated by botanical experts. The leaves were washed

and shade dried until moisture content was evaporated. The dried leaves was milled to fine

uniform powder in an electric grinder and then extracted with ethanol by using Soxhlet

method according to Pavela et al., (2008). Then resultant extract was filtered and

concentrated in rotary evaporator under reduced pressure. The dark-green residues were

stored at 4°C until use.




Bioassays: The toxic and feeding deterrent actions of three plant leaf extracts were

evaluated against castor semilooper, A. janata third instar larvae through leaf disc no-choice

method as described by Akthar et al, (2012). Fresh castor leaf discs (21 cm2) were cut by

using cork borer and treated with extracts at the concentrations of 0.5, 1, 2, 4 and 8 mg/cm2 in

acetone. Control leaf discs were treated with acetone only and allowed to evaporate the

solvent. Uniform sized third instar larvae of A. janata were collected in stock culture and then

maintained without food for 2-3 hours in plastic container. The single larva was allowed feed

for 24 hrs on treated leaf and there were ten replicates for each treatment and all treatments

were repeated for three times. After 24 hrs the feeding deterrent effects were recorded and

determined feeding deterrent index using the formula of (C-T)/(C+T)×100, where C is

control and T is treated. The larvae were maintained on normal diet in separate container for

the observation of toxic effects for 24 hrs.

The toxic and feeding deterrent effect of three plant extracts on rice weevil, S. oryzae

were studied according to Yankanchi et al., (2014). The six concentrations of three plants

extract such 0.5, 1, 2, 4 and 8 mg/gm of wheat were prepared in acetone. One gram of wheat

seed was tremble mixed with extract and control wheat was mixed with acetone only. The

grains were allowed to evaporate the solvent for while and then in each treatment 10 adults

unsexed adults were introduced. The experiments were repeated times and after 24 hrs

antifeedant was recorded and determined feeding deterrent index using the above mentioned

formula. The insects transferred to separate container and maintained on untreated wheat

seeds for two days for toxic effects observations. The toxic and feeding deterrent results were

analyzed one-way Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) and means were separated by using

Turkey‟s LSD test.

Results and Discussion

The present study results indicate that the C. multiflorum leaf ethanol extract acts as

potential toxic to third instar larvae of Achaea janata as well as Sitophilus oryzae adults

(Table 1). However, the C. viscosum extract was relatively effective to A. janata but not to S.

oryzae whereas C. serratum extract was reveled highest activity against S. oryzae but not on

A. janata. The results obtained in this study are interesting in the context of varied level of

efficacy of the plant extracts to both insect pests. The plant origin chemicals are generally

showed different degree of activities against the various insects in fact, the biological

activities of plant extracts mainly depends upon the number of factors (Akhtar et al., 2012;

Isman and Seffrin, 2014). Although, commonly depends on the phonology and/or part of




plants used with extraction method and solvents used for extraction (Pavela et al., 2009). The

extracts treated leaf fed A. janata larvae showed hyperactivity and then reduced feeding

behavior indicates that extracts might have impact on digestive enzymes or unable digest the

ingested food. Subsequently larvae reduced the feeding (Table 2) as a result larval size

decreased and become inactive prior to death. In most of the time, survived larvae after

treatment produced small sized or deformed pupae and even adults. Similar observations

documented in plant extracts treated lepidoptera larvae for instance natural quinines extracted

from the four plants different parts material treated diet fed Tricoplusia ni larvae produced

deformed pupae and adults ((Akhtar et al., 2012) and Clerodendrum inerme, Vitex negundo

and Argemone mexicana ethanol extract treated A. janata larvae revealed deformed pupae

and adults (Yankanchi, 2009; Devarshi et al., 2017). Generally insect growth and

development is regulated by certain hormones, in treatment of plant chemicals to insects

might imbalanced endocrine system of insects as a results treated larvae produced deformed

pupae and adults. The similar results were observed by various researchers working on

botanical pesticides on different insect pests (Pereira and Gurudutt, 1990; Patil et al., 2006;

Isman, 2006; Jadhav et al., 2016).

Toxic and feeding deterrent efficacy of C. multiflorum leaf ethanol extract showed

highest against S. oryzae adults as compared to other two plants extract (Table 1). Plant

extracts treated wheat grains were not damaged by weevil prove that volatility of extracts

inhibit the feeding (Table 2) due to that adults were unable to survive. Though, they fed

treated grains but consumption of food was less and it indicated by less damage of grains.

The volatile components of plant extracts inhibit the insects breathing by closing the spiracles

hence toxic effect was high when compared to the feeding deterrent activity (Prasad et al.,

2008; Yankanchi et al., 2009; Yankanchi et al., 2014) due to that region, since long and also

present, stored grain insect pests were controlled by using fumigants (Singh and Sharma,

2015). Besides that, currently the plant essential oils are attracting the researchers to utilize

them in integrated pest management of stored grain pests.

It appears from the results that the chemical components extracted from leaves of

three plants showed various levels of efficacy however, the C. multiflorum extract found to be

effective to control of both insect pests. Secondary metabolites of several plants are well

known for their toxic and insect feeding deterrent activities with different chemicals for

instance terpenoids. The genus Clerodendrum includes the number of plant species which

containing bioactive substances particularly components for example monoterpenes,

diterpenes and sequiterpenes (Pandey et al., 2005). The work on C. multiflorum plant




chemical isolation and characterization of active components and the possible utilization in

the field level are under progress.

Table 1. Toxic efficacy of plant extracts against A. janata and S. oryzae

Dose mg/cm2

Achaea janata

Percent toxicity ± SD

C. viscosum C. multiflorum C. serratum

0.5 13 ± 2.51 18 ± 3.97 11 ± 1.85

1.0 29 ± 4.61 37 ± 4.61 25 ± 3.27

2.0 38 ± 3.67 49 ± 3.38 31 ± 5.12

4.0 56 ± 5.18 63 ± 6.40 36 ± 2.98

8.0 64 ± 4.27 78 ± 7.82 44 ± 3.48

Dose mg/gm Sitophilus oryzae

0.5 08 ± 2.08 16 ± 1.53 14 ± 2.10

1.0 19 ± 2.41 27 ± 2.87 21 ± 2.82

2.0 29 ± 3.34 38 ± 4.21 34 ± 3.46

4.0 37 ± 3.12 54 ± 5.87 49 ± 3.97

8.0 41 ± 4.57 63 ± 5.14 56 ± 5.21

Table 2. Feeding deterrent efficacy of plant extracts against A. janata and S. oryzae

Dose mg/cm2

Achaea janata

Percent feeding deterrent index ± SD

C. viscosum C. multiflorum C. serratum

0.5 17 ± 2.09 20 ± 3.26 13 ± 2.31

1.0 21 ± 3.64 25 ± 4.90 18 ± 3.12

2.0 32 ± 4.17 34 ± 5.32 26 ± 4.36

4.0 44 ± 4.73 48 ± 6.23 32 ± 4.60

8.0 50 ± 5.61 54 ± 6.85 38 ± 5.76

Dose mg/gm Sitophilus oryzae

0.5 12 ± 3.20 16 ± 3.82 10 ± 2.31

1.0 21 ± 3.78 24 ± 3.34 16 ± 3.19

2.0 28 ± 4.23 33 ± 4.65 21 ± 4.12

4.0 35 ± 4.64 42 ± 5.53 26 ± 4.87

8.0 43 ± 6.30 48 ± 6.84 30 ± 5.40




REFERENCES

1. Akhtar, Y. Isman, M. B. Niehaus, L. A. Lee, C. H. and Lee, H. S. 2012. Antifeedant and

toxic effects of natural and synthetic quinines to the Trichoplusia ni (cabbage lopper),

Crop Protection, 31: 8-14.

2. Benhalima, H. Chaudhry, M. Q. Mills, K. A. and Price, N. R. 2004. Phosphine resistance

in stored-product insects collected from various grain storage facilities in Morocco,

Journal of Stored Products Research 40: 241-249.

3. Devarshi, A. A. and Yankanchi, S. R. 2017. Ovicidal and toxic effects of certain plant

extracts to the castor semilooper, Achaea janata L. Indian Journal of Agricultural

Research, 51(4): 345-349.

4. Dhingra, S. 1998. Susceptibility status of castor semilooper, Achaea janata Linn. to

pyrethroids and non-pyrethroid insecticides during last two decade, Journal of

Entomology Research, 22(1): 43-47.

5. Isman, M. B. 2006. Botanical insecticides, deterrents, and repellents in modern

agriculture and an increasingly regulated world, Annual Review of Entomology, 51: 45–

66.

6. Isman, M. B., Seffrin, R. 2014. Natural insecticides from the Annonaceae: A unique

example for developing biopesticides, Advances in Plant Biopesticides, 21-33.

7. Jadhav, G. S., Devarshi, A. A. and Yankanchi, S. R. 2016. Efficacy of certain

Clerodendrum leaf crude extracts against Spodoptera litura Fab. and Helicoverpa

armigera Hub., Journal of Entomology and Zoology Studies, 4: 466-472.

8. Kanchanapoom, T. Kasaia, R. Chumsric, P. Hiragad, Y. and Yamasaki, K. 2001.

Megastigmane and iridoid glucosides from Clerodendrum inerme. Phytochemistry, 58:

333-336

9. Pandey, R. Verma, R. K. and Gupta, M. M. 2005. Neo-clerodane diterpenoids from

Clerodendrum inerme, Phytochemistry, 66: 643-648.

10. Patil, P. B., Holihosur, S. N. and Kallapur, V. L. 2006. Efficacy of natural product,

Clerodendron inerme against mosquito vector Aedes aegypti. Current Science, 90: 1064-

1066.

11. Pavela, R., Sajfrtova, M., Sovova, H. and Barnet, M., 2008. The insecticidal activity of

Satureja hortensis L. by supercritical fluid and traditional extraction techniques, Applied.

Entomology and Zoology, 43(3): 377-382.




12. Pereira, J. and Gurudutt, K.N. 1990. Growth inhibition of Musca domestica L. and Culex

quinquefasciatus (Say) by (levo)-3-epicaryoptin isolated from leaves of Clerodendron

inerme (Gaertn.) (Verbenaceae), Journal of Chemical Ecology, 16: 2297-2306.

13. Pol, S. U. Phase, T. K. and Yankanchi, S. R. 2014. Anti-inflammatory activity of

methanol leaf extract of Clerodendrum viscosum L. in rat, Rattus rattus, Flora & Fauna

20(2): 109-112.

14. Prasad, K. Singh, S. C. and Singh, B. K. 2008. Biology of rice weevil, S. oryzae (L.)

(Coleoptera: Curculionidae) infesting stored wheat, Journal of Zoology 28(1):109-111.

15. Roy, R. Pandey, V. B. Singh, U. P. Prithiviraj, B. 1996. Antifungal activity of the

flavonoids from Clerodendrum infortunatum roots, Fitoterapia, 67: 473-474.

16. Shrivastava, N. and Patel, T. 2007. Clerodendrum and Heathcare: An overview,

Medicinal and Aromatic Plant Science and Biotechnology. 1(1): 142-150.

17. Singh, G. and Sharma, R. K. 2015. Alternatives to phosphine fumigation of stored grains:

The Indian perspective, Himachal Journal of Agricultural Research, 41(2): 104-113.

18. Sukumar, K. Perich, M. J. and Boobar, L. R. 1991. Botanical derivatives in mosquito

control: a review, Journal of the American Mosquito Control Association, 7: 210–237.

19. Yankanchi, S. R and Koli, S. A. 2010. Anti-inflammatory and analgesic activity of

mature leaves methanol extract of Clerodendrum inerme L. (Gaertn), Journal of

Pharmaceutical Sciences and Research, 2(11): 782-785.

20. Yankanchi, S. R. Jadhav, A. D. and Patil, P. M. 2014. Insecticidal and repellant activities

of Clerodendrum serratum L. leaf extract against rice weevil, Sitophilus oryzae L., Asian

Journal of Biological and Life Sciences, 3(1): 35-39.

21. Yankanchi, S. R. 2009. Efficacy of different solvents extract of Clerodendron inerme

Gaertn. against larvae of castor semilooper, Achaea janata L. Uttar Pradesh Journal

of Zoology, 29: 299-303.

22. Yankanchi, S. R., Koli, S. A. and Patil, P. A. 2009. Insecticidal activity of certain plant

extracts against pulse beetle, Callosobruchus chinensis L. (Coleoptera: Bruchidae).

Entomon, 34(4): 263-266.

http://scholar.google.co.in/citations?view_op=view_citation&hl=en&user=WRWcEtgAAAAJ&citation_for_view=WRWcEtgAAAAJ:KlAtU1dfN6UC

http://scholar.google.co.in/citations?view_op=view_citation&hl=en&user=WRWcEtgAAAAJ&citation_for_view=WRWcEtgAAAAJ:KlAtU1dfN6UC




INVESTIGATING AND ANALYZING FINANCIAL EVIDENCE OF

FORENSIC ACCOUNTING

PROF. MRS. A. R. GHUMATKAR


Arts, Commerce and Science College, Narayangaon, Pune.

E-Mail : [email protected] Cell : 9763185608

ABSTRACT

Forensic accountants may be involved in recovering proceeds of crime and in

relation to confiscation proceedings concerning actual or assumed proceeds of crime of

money laundering. Forensic accountants utilize an understanding of economic theories,

business information, financial reporting systems, accounting and auditing standards

and procedures, data management & electronic discovery, evidence gathering and

investigative techniques, and litigation processes and procedures to perform their work.

Forensic accountants are also increasingly playing more proactive risk reduction roles

by designing and performing extended procedures as part of the statutory audit, acting

as advisers to audit committees, fraud deterrence engagements, and assisting in

investment analyst research. Forensic Accounting or Financial Forensics is the

specialty practice area of accountancy that describes engagements that result from

actual or anticipated disputes or litigation. Forensic means suitable for use in a court of

law and it is to that standard and potential outcome that Forensic Accountants generally

have to work. Forensic Accountants, also referred to as forensic auditors or

investigative auditors, often have to give expert evidence at the eventual trial. All of the

larger accounting firms, as well as many medium-sized and boutique firms have

specialist Forensic Accounting departments. Within these groups, there may be further

sub-specializations: some Forensic Accountants may, for example, just specialize in

insurance claims, personal injury claims, and fraud, construction or royalty audits.

KEYWORDS

Forensic Accounting, Financial Forensics, Forensic Accountants, Forensic

Auditors, Investigative Auditors, Business Information, Financial Reporting Systems etc.




INTRODUCTION

The integration of accounting, auditing and investigative skills yields the

specialty known as Forensic Accounting. Forensic, according to the Webster‟s

Dictionary means, Belonging to, used in or suitable to courts of judicature or to public

discussion and debate. Forensic Accounting, provides an accounting analysis that is

suitable to the court which will form the basis for discussion, debate and ultimately

dispute resolution. Forensic Accounting encompasses both Litigation Support and

Investigative Accounting.

As Forensic Accountants, we utilize accounting, auditing and investigative skills

when conducting an investigation. Equally critical is our ability to respond immediate

and to communicate financial information clearly and concisely in a courtroom setting.

Forensic Accountants are trained to look beyond the numbers and deal with the business

reality of the situation. Forensic accountants may be involved in recovering proceeds of

crime and in relation to confiscation proceedings concerning actual or assumed proceeds

of crime of money laundering. In the United Kingdom, relevant legislation is contained

in the Proceeds of Crime Act 2002. In India there is a separate breed of forensic

accountants called Certified Forensic Accounting Professionals. In other countries, some

forensic accountants are Certified Fraud Examiners, Certified Public Accountants with

AICPA‟s Certified in Financial Forensics (CFF) Credentials, Chartered Accountants or

Chartered Certified Accountants.

Forensic accountants utilize an understanding of economic theories, business

information, financial reporting systems, accounting and auditing standards and

procedures, data management & electronic discovery, evidence gathering and

investigative techniques, and litigation processes and procedures to perform their work.

Forensic accountants are also increasingly playing more proactive risk reduction roles by

designing and performing extended procedures as part of the statutory audit, acting as

advisers to audit committees, fraud deterrence engagements, and assisting in investment

analyst research.

While Forensic Accountants usually do not provide opinions, the work

performed and reports issued will often provide answers to the how, where, what, why

and who. The FAs have and are continuing to evolve in terms of utilizing technology to

assist in engagements to identify anomalies and inconsistencies. It is important to

remember that it is not the Forensic Accountants that determine fraud, but instead the




court.


The said research study was carried out with following objectives in view:-

1. To study the concept of Forensic Accounting in India.

2. To study the characteristics of Forensic Accountant.

3. To study the assignments perform by a Forensic Accountant.

HYPOTHESIS

The main hypothesis of the said research paper is as follows:

“In modern world, Forensic Accountants utilize an understanding of

economic theories, accounting and auditing standards to develop the knowledge of

our enterprise profit.”



collected and reviewed the literature on the topic concerned. With the above objectives

keep in mind the instructed Interview Method and Desk Research Method was basically

adopted. The Secondary Data is collected from various reference books related to

Forensic Accounting, Financial Forensics, Forensic Accountants, Forensic Auditors,

Investigative Auditors, Business Information, Financial Reporting Systems, Commerce

& Management, and Marketing & Finance etc. For said research study secondary data is

also collected from the National and International Research Journals which are related to

Commerce, Management, Marketing and Forensic Accounting. The secondary data is

also collected from various websites.

CHARACTERISTICS OF FORENSIC ACCOUNTANT

A capable Forensic Accountant should have the following characteristics.

Curiosity

persistence

creativity

discretion

organization

confidence




Sound professional judgments.

A Forensic Accountant must be open to consider all alternatives, scrutinize the fine

details and at the same time see the big picture. In addition, a Forensic Accountant must

be able to listen effectively and communicate clearly and concisely.

WHAT DOES A FORENSIC ACCOUNTANT DO?

A Forensic Accountant is often retained to analyze, interpret, summarize and

present complex financial and business related issues in a manner which is both

understandable and properly supported.

Forensic Accountants can be engaged in public practice or employed by

insurance companies, banks, police forces, government agencies and other

organizations.

Investigating and analyzing financial evidence

Developing computerized applications to assist in the analysis and presentation of

financial evidence

Communicating their findings in the form of reports, exhibits and collections of

documents and

Assisting in legal proceedings, including testifying in court as an expert witness and

preparing visual aids to support trial evidence.

In order to properly perform these services a Forensic Accountant must be familiar with

legal concepts and procedures. In addition, a Forensic Accountant must be able to

identify substance over form when dealing with an issue.

ASSIGNMENTS PERFORM BY A FORENSIC ACCOUNTANT

Forensic Accountants become involved in a wide range of investigations,

spanning many different industries. The practical and in-depth analysis that a Forensic

Accountants will bring to a case helps uncover trends that bring to light the relevant

issues.

Detailed below are various areas in which a Forensic Accountant will often

become involved.

1. Criminal Investigations

Forensic investigations often relate to criminal investigations on behalf of police

forces. For example, a Forensic Accountant may be trained by the RCMP, the OPP as




well as by regional or local police forces and organizations such as the law Society.

A Forensic Accountants report is prepared with the objective of presenting

evidence in a professional and concise manner.

2. Shareholders and partnership Disputes

These assignments often involve a detailed analysis of numerous years

accounting records to qualify the issues in dispute. For example, a common issue that

often arises is the compensation and benefits received by each of the disputing

shareholders or partners.

3. Personal Injury Claims/Motor Vehicle Accidents

A Forensic Accountant is often asked to quantify the economic losses resulting

from a motor vehicle accident. A Forensic Accountant needs to be familiar with the

legislation in place which pertains to motor vehicle accidents.

Cases of medical malpractice and wrongful dismissal often involve similar issues

in calculating the resulting economic damages.

4. Business Interruption/Other Types of Insurance Claims

Insurance policies differ significantly as to their terms and conditions.

Accordingly, these assignments involve a detailed review of the policy to investigate

coverage issues and the appropriate method of calculating the loss.

A Forensic Accountant is often asked to assist from either an insured or insurers

perspective in the settlement of a case. Examples of these types of assignments include,

business interruptions, property losses and employee dishonesty claims.

5. Matrimonial Disputes

Matrimonial disputes from a Forensic Accounting point-of-view often involve

the tracing, locating and evaluation of assets. The assets to be evaluated and valued may

be business, property or other assets.

6. Business Economic Losses

Examples of assignments involving business economic losses include, contract

disputes, construction claims, expropriations, product liability claims, trademark and

patent infringements and losses stemming from a breach of a non-competition

agreement.

7. Professional Negligence

These investigations are often approached from two different but complimentary

perspectives, these being-




Technical-has a breach of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles or Generally

Accepted Auditing Standards or other standards of practice occurred and

Loss Quantification.

If the professional in question is a n accountant then a Forensic Accountant could

be involved with both perspectives. If the matter involves some other profession a

Forensic Accountant will normally be retained to perform only loss quantification.

8. Medication and Arbitration

Because of their familiarity and comfort with legal issues procedures some

Forensic Accountants have sought out special training and become involved in

alternative dispute resolution (ADR).

CONCLUSION

Forensic Accountants are more than just number crunchers that happen to work

on criminal or civil disputes these accountants possess additional skills. They must

conduct investigations, know how to use a variety of computer programs and

communicate well. Some Forensic Accountants specialize in specific industries that are

susceptible to fraud, such as insurance or banking, and learn the business practices

associated with those fields. Because the reputations of individuals and companies are at

stake, Forensic Accountants must be very discreet when conducting their investigations.

They must be independent and impartial, taking into account both the financial records

and the conduct of employees. Unlike other accountants, when Forensic Accountants

conduct audits, they are actively looking for signs of fraud. In addition to examining

financial statements to determine whether they are accurate and complete, they may seek

out internal databases and court records. Because people committing fraud have hidden

the evidence of their crimes, Forensic Accountants must look beyond the numbers and

anticipate criminal actions.

REFERENCES

1. The Chartered Accountancy Journal, January 2007.

2. KPMG India Fraud Survey 2006.

3. Article on LSU professor from the advocate online, 2002.

4. Paper on Forensic Accounting by Dr. K. Sunder and S. Selverasu Annamalai

University.




5. Deccan Herald April 11 2005, Bank Fraud by BPO staffers undermines industry

FORENSIC ACCOUNTING Forensic Accounting. finance monster.com, Fight fraud

as a Forensic Accountant. Ernst & Young report 2004.

6. IBN live report BPO staff need ethical training. www.corpotatenarc.com , on Enron,

Xerox and AIG accounting scandals.

7. Article by Joseph T. Wells on Small Businesses Big Losses, the founder and

chairman of the Association of Certified Fraud Examiners.

8. Crumbley D. Larry, Lester E. Heitger, G. Stevenson Smith (2005), Forensic and

Investigative Accounting, CCH group, ISBN 0808013653.

9. Cicchella Denise (2005), Construction audit guide: Overview, monitoring and

auditing, Altamonte Springs, FL:IIA Research Foundation, ISBN 0894135872.

10. Smith, Russell L. Parr, Gordon V. (2010), Intellectual Property : Valuation,

Exploitation and Infringement damages, Hoboken N. J. : Wiley. pp. Chapter 33,

ISBN 0470457031

11. Nigrini Mark (2011), Forensic Analytics : Methods and Techniques for Forensic

Accounting Investigations, Hoboken N. J. : Wiley, ISBN 978-0-470-89046-2.

12. www.odu.edu.

13. www.forensicfccounting.com

http://www.odu.edu/

http://www.forensicfccounting.com/




IMPACT OF ELECTRONIC BANKING ON INDIAN BANKING SECTOR

KHANUJA PARAMJIT MAHENDRASINGH

P.D.V.P. College, Tasgao, Sangali

Shivaji University, Kolhapur

Email - [email protected]

Cell - 9422414448

ABSTRACT - The e-banking has come to be recognized as a virtual necessity to face the

imminent challenges owing to globalization and liberalization of the economy. A wide range

of services are being offered by banks using technology.

The Indian Banking Industry is undergoing a paradigm shift in scope, context,

structure, functions and governance. The information and communication technology

revolution is radically and perceptibly changing the operational environment of the banks.

Technology has emerged as a strategic resources for achieving higher efficiency, control of

operations, productivity and profitability. Technology not only plays an important role in

development and introduction of new products and facilities like ATMs., tele-banking,

internet banking etc. but also plays a pivotal role in terms of achieving operational efficiency.

Technology also aids in the asset liability management process by enabling the top

management to decide on product pricing in a competitive scenario.

KEY WORDS - Electronic Banking (E-Banking), Banking Technology, Consumers, Banking

Industry, Economy etc.

INTRODUCTION

The e-banking has come to be recognized as a virtual necessity to face the imminent

challenges owing to globalization and liberalization of the economy. A wide range of services

are being offered by banks using technology.

The Indian Banking Industry is undergoing a paradigm shift in scope, context,

structure, functions and governance. The information and communication technology

revolution is radically and perceptibly changing the operational environment of the banks.

Technology has emerged as a strategic resources for achieving higher efficiency, control of

operations, productivity and profitability. Technology not only plays an important role in

development and introduction of new products and facilities like ATMs., tele-banking,




internet banking etc. but also plays a pivotal role in terms of achieving operational efficiency.

Technology also aids in the asset liability management process by enabling the top

management to decide on product pricing in a competitive scenario.

Technology has brought about a complete paradigm shift in the functioning of

banks and delivery, of banking services. Gone are the days when every banking transaction

required a visit to the bank branch. Today, most of transactions can be done from the

comforts of one's home and customers need not visit the bank branch for anything.

Technology is no longer an enabler, but a business driver. The" growth of the internet,

mobiles and communication technology has added a different dimension to banking. The

information technology (IT) available today is being leveraged in customer acquisitions,

driving automation and process efficiency, delivering" ease and efficiency to customers.

Many of the IT initiatives of banks started in the late 1990s, or early 2000, with an emphasis

on the adoption of core banking solutions (CBS), automation of branches and centralization

of operations in the CBS. Over the last decade, most of the banks completed the

transformation to technology-driven organizations. Moving from a manual, scale-constrained

environment to a global presence with automated systems and processes, it is difficult to

envisage the adverse scenario where the sector was in the era before the reforms, when a

simple deposit or withdrawal of cash would require a day. ATMs, mobile banking and online

bill payments facilities to vendors and utility service providers have almost obviated the need

for customers to visit a branch. Branches are also transforming from operating as transaction

processing points into relationship management hubs.


The world is changing at a staggering rate and technology is considered to be the

key driver for these changes around us. An analysis of technology and its uses show that it

has permeated in almost every aspect of our life. Many activities are handled electronically

due to the acceptance of information technology at home as well as at workplace. Slowly but

steadily, the Indian customer is moving towards the internet banking. The ATM and the Net

transactions are becoming popular. But the customers clear on one thing that he wants net-

banking to be simple and the banking sector is matching its steps to the march of technology.

E-banking or Online banking is a generic term for the delivery of banking services and

products through the electronic channels such as the telephone, the internet, the cell phone

etc. The concept and scope of e-banking is still evolving. It facilitates an effective payment




and accounting system thereby enhancing the speed of delivery of banking services

considerably.

Technology is the key with which the door to a new world can be opened. The bank

can achieve everyone of the objectives mentioned above provided they adopt the fruits of

technology available to us today. The absorption of technology has changed the face of

banking elsewhere in the world. We have no doubt that a similar transformation can be

brought about in India as well. While embarking upon a large scale programme

mechanization, it is not enough to consider only the functions to be mechanized and the types

of equipments needed for mechanizing these functions. The problems associated with

transaction from the old system to the modern mechanized system have to be anticipated and

tackled suitably. The geographical spread of banking business is highly skewed and the

infrastructural facilities are also unevenly developed in different territories. In relation to the

magnitude of the task involved, banks will require some time to create awareness about the

computer culture within the managements and employees and develop necessary resource.

Electronic banking is one of the truly widespread avatars of E- commerce the world

over. E-banking refers to electronic banking. It is like E-business in banking industry. E-

banking is also called as "Virtual Banking" or "Online Banking". E-banking is a result of the

growing expectations of bank's customers. E-banking involves information technology based

banking. Under this IT system, the banking services are delivered by way of a Computer-

Controlled System. This system does involve direct interface with the customers. The

customers do not have to visit the bank's premises. Online banking can simply be defined as

the process of entering into transactions by a particular client and the bank using modern

technology. With the various capabilities of the computer and other technological

developments, online banking is one of the many businesses that benefited from it. Since

banking plays a very important role in the economy of a nation, then there is truly a need to

maximize and improve its features to be client friendly and easy to access.

The story of technology in banking started with the use of punched card machines like

Accounting Machines or Ledger Posting Machines. The use of technology, at that time, was

limited to keeping books of the bank. It further developed with the birth of online real "time

system and vast improvement in telecommunications during late1970's and 1980‟s.it resulted

in a revolution in the field of banking with "convenience banking" as a buzzword. Through

Convenience banking, the bank is carried to the door step of the customer. The 1990's saw the

birth of distributed computing technologies and Relational Data Base

Management System. The banking industry was simply waiting for the technologies. Now




with distribution technologies, one could configure dedicated machines called front-end

machines for customer service and risk control while communication in the batch mode

without hampering the response time on the front-end machine.

Intense competition has forced banks to rethink the way they operated their business.

They had to reinvent and improve their products and services to make them more beneficial

and cost effective. Technology in the form of E-banking has made it possible to find alternate

banking practices at lower costs. More and. more people are using electronic banking

products and services because large section of the banks future customer base will be made

up of computer literate customer, the banks must be able to offer these customer products and

services that allow them to do their banking by electronic means. If they fail to do this will,

simply, not survive. New products and services are emerging that are set to Change the way

we look at money and the monetary system.


The said research study was carried out with following objectives in view:-

4. To study the concept of Electronic Banking.

5. To study the impact of E-Banking on Indian Banking Sector.

6. To study the Advantages and Disadvantages of Electronic Banking.

HYPOTHESIS

The main hypothesis of the said research paper is as follows:

1. Indian banking system developed enormously after independence, particularly after

nationalization of banks there has been a multi-dimensional development.

2. Due to adoption of E-Banking services numbers of transactions are increased.

3. Electronic banking is one of the truly widespread avatars of E- commerce the world

over.



collected on the topic concerned. The literature was thus collected by visiting various

libraries. Some Government offices were also visited for getting office record and statistical

data. The secondary data is also collected from various websites.

With the above objectives keep in mind the instructed Interview Method and Desk

Research Method was basically adopted. Researcher interviewed 90 branch managers of




private & nationalized banks. The opinions of 90 branch managers are analysed and results

are drawn. The Secondary Data is collected from various reference books related to Banking

System, Banking Technological Sectors, Modern Banking, E-Banking, Commerce &

Management, and Banking etc. For said research study secondary data is also collected from

the National and International Research Journals which are related to Commerce,

Management, Banking etc.

ADVANTAGES OF E-BANKING

The advantages of E-Banking Services are as follows :

1) Advantages to Consumers

General consumers have been significantly affected in a positive manner by E-

banking. Many of the ordinary tasks have now been fully automated resulting in greater ease

and comfort.

a. Customer's account is extremely accessable with an online account.

b. Through Internet Banking customer can operate his account while sitting in his office

or home. There is no need to go to the bank in person for such matter.

c. All services that are usually available from the local bank can be found on a single

website.

d. Banks are available for 24 hours a day, seven days a week and they are only a mouse

click away.

e. Customer can withdraw at any time through ATMs that are, now widely available

throughout the country.

f. Besides withdrawing cash customers can also have mini banks statements balance

inquiry at these ATMs.

g. E banking has also greatly helped in payment of utility bill. Now there is no need to

stand in long queues outside banks for this purpose.

h. The Growth of credit card usage also owes greatly to E- banking. Now a customer can

shop worldwide without any need of carrying paper money with him.

2) Advantages to Banking Industry

Banking industry has also received numerous benefits due to growth of E-Banking

infrastructure. They are highlighted below:

The growth of E-banking has greatly helped the banks in controlling their overheads and

operating cost.




a. The rise of E-banking has made banks more competitive. It has also led to expansion

of the banking industry, opening of new avenues for banking operations.

b. The reach and delivery capabilities of computer networks, such as the Internet, are far

better than any branch network.

c. Electronic banking has greatly helped the banking industry to reduce paper work, thus

helping them to move the paper less environment.

d. Electronic banking has also helped bank in proper documentation of their records and

transactions.

e. Many repetitive and tedious tasks have now been fully automated resulting in greater

efficiency, better time usage and enhanced control.

3) Benefits to General Economy

Electronic Banking as already stated has greatly serviced both the general public and

the-banking industry. This has resulted - in creation of a better enabling environment that

supports growth, productivity and prosperity. Besides many tangible benefit in form of

reduction is cost, reduced delivery time, increased efficiency, reduced wastage, E-banking

electronically controlled and thoroughly monitored environment discourage many illegal and

illegitimate practices associated with banking industry like money laundering, frauds and

embezzlements. Further E-banking has helped banks in better monitoring of their customer

base. It is a useful tool in the hand of the bank to device suitable commercial packages that

are in conformity with customer needs. As E-banking provides opportunity to banking sector

to enlarge their customer base, a consequence to increase the volume of credit creation which

results in better economic condition. Besides all this E-banking has also helped in

documentation of the economic activity of the masses.

DISADVANTAGES OF E-BANKING

The disadvantages of E-Banking Services are as follows :

1) Security

Direct banks are subject to the same laws and regulations as traditional banks and

accounts are protected by the FDIC. Sophisticated encryption software is designed to protect

your account information but no system is perfect. Accounts may be subject to phishing,

.hacker attacks, malware and other unauthorised activity. Most banks now make scanned

copies of cleared checks available online which helps to avoid and identify check fraud. It

enables verification that all checks are signed by the customer and that dollar or euro amounts




have not been changed. The timely discovery of discrepancies can be reported and

investigated immediately.

2) Bank Relationship

A traditional bank provides the opportunity to develop a personal relationship with

that bank. Getting to know the people at your local branch can be an advantage when a

customer needs a loan or a special service that is not normally offered to the public. A bank

manager usually has some discretion in changing the terms of customer's account if the

customer's personal circumstances change. They can help customers solve problems such as

reversing an undeserved fee. The banker also will get to know the customer and his unique

needs. If the customer has a business account, this personal relationship may help if the

customer needs capital to expand. It's easier to get the bank's support if there is someone who

understands customer's business and vouch for his operating plan,

3) Transaction Issues

Sometimes a face-to-face meeting is required to complete complex transactions and

address complicated problems. A traditional bank can host meetings and call in experts to

solve a specific issue. Moreover, international transactions may be more difficult (or

impossible) with some direct banks. If a customer deposits cash on a regular basis, a

traditional bank with a drive-through window - may be more practical and efficient.

4) Service Issues

Some direct banks may not offer all the comprehensive financial services such as

insurance and brokerage accounts that traditional banks offer. Traditional banks sometimes

offer special services to loyal customers such as preferred rates and investment advice at no

extra charge. In addition, routine services such as notarization and bank signature guarantee

are not available online. These services are required for many financial and legal transactions.

CONCLUSION

In recent time E-banking has spread rapidly all over the globe. All Banks are making

greater use of E-banking facilities to provide better service and to excel in competition. The

spread of E-banking has also greatly benefited the ordinary customer in general and corporate

world in particular. Technology in the form of E-banking has made it possible to find

alternate banking practices at lower costs. More and. more people are using electronic

banking products and services because large section of the banks future customer base will be

made up of computer literate customer, the banks must be able to offer these customer

products and services that allow them to do their banking by electronic means.




REFERENCES

1. Kotler, Philip, Marketing Management, Pearson Education (Singapore) Pvt. Ltd.,

2003.

2. Kotler, Philip, Armstrong, Gary, Principles of Management, Pearson Education

(Singapore) Pvt. Ltd., 2004.

3. Madhukar R. K., Dynamics of Bank Marketing, Sri Sudhindra Publishing House,

1990.

4. Majumdar, Ramanuj, Product Management in India, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,

2004.

5. Louis W. Stern and Adell EI-Ansary, marketing Channels.

6. Meidan, Arthur, Bank Marketing Management, Macmillan Publishers Ltd., 1984.

7. Mukherjee D.D., Credit Appraisal Risk Analysis and Decision Making, Snow White

Publications P. Ltd., Mumbai.

8. Patodiya S.N., Practical Problems on Banking, Amit Publication, Jaipur.

9. Payne, Adrian, The Essence of Service Marketing, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,

1995.

10. Pezzullo, Mary Ann, Marketing Financial Services, American Bankers Association,

Indian Institute of Bankers, 1999.

11. www.jaspi.justice.gov.sk

12. www.banky.sk

13. www.aboulola/com/E-Banking

14. www.tradingeconomics.com

http://www.banky.sk/

http://www.aboulola/com/E-Banking

Documents

Aarhat Publication & Aarhat Journal’s...SHIRISH S. PINGALE 76-83 16 PROGRESS OF CO-OPERATIVE SECTOR - A CASE STUDY OF MAHARASHTRA STATE DR. B. S. SALUNKHE 84-88 17 MICROFINANCE :